RS/6000 7043 Model 260 IBM

Service Guide

SA38-0554-00
First Edition (October 1998)

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where
such provisions are inconsistent with local law: THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS
IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied
warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions
of the publication. The manufacturer may make improvements and/or changes in the
product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time, without notice.

It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, products
(machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country.
Such references or information must not be construed to mean that these products,
programming, or services will be announced in your country. Any reference to a specific
licensed program in this publication is not intended to state or imply that you can use only that
licensed program. You can use any functionally equivalent program instead.

Requests for technical information about products should be made to your authorized reseller
or marketing representative.

 International Business Machines Corporation 1998. All rights reserved.

Note to U.S. Government Users -- Documentation related to restricted rights -- Use,
duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth is GSA ADP Schedule Contract with
IBM Corp.
Contents

Communications Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
European Union (EU) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
United Kingdom Telecommunications Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du Canada . ix
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . ix
VCCI Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Radio Protection for Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Unit Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Laser Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Environmental Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Product Recycling and Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Battery Return Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Environmental Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

ISO 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Chapter 1. Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

System Unit Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Service Inspection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Quick Entry MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
MAP 1020: Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
MAP 1240: Memory Problem Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
MAP 1520: Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Firmware/POST Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Preface iii
Bus SRN to FRU Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Typical Boot Sequence for 7043 Model 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Boot Problems/Concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Chapter 4. Location Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Physical Location Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
AIX Location Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
AIX and Physical Location Code Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Chapter 5. Loading the System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Chapter 6. System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Graphical System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
MultiBoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
RIPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
SCSI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Text-Based System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
MultiBoot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Handling Static–Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Procedure List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Stopping the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Processor and Memory Card Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Processor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Internal Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Configuration or Deconfiguration of Media Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
iv Service Guide
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
CEC Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
I/O Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Disk Drive Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
CD-ROM Drive, Tape Drive, Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Chapter 8. Parts Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Appendix A. Service Processor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Service Processor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
General User Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Privileged User Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Service Processor Functions and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Service Processor Operational Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Service Processor Procedures in Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42

Appendix B. Interpreting Firmware Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1

Reader's Comments — We'd Like to Hear From You . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-3

Preface v
vi Service Guide
Communications Statements

The following statement applies to this product. The statement for other products
intended for use with this product appears in their accompanying documentation.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement

Note: The 7043 Model 260 been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Ÿ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Ÿ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Ÿ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Ÿ Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from
authorized dealers. Neither the provider nor the manufacturer are responsible for
any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables
and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Responsible Party:
International Business Machines Corporation
New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
Telephone: (919) 543-2193

Communications Statements vii

European Union (EU) Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive

89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility. The manufacturer cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of option cards supplied by third
parties. Consult with your dealer or sales representative for details on your specific
hardware.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22 / European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication devices.

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Statement

This product has been designed and built to comply with IEC Standard 950.

United Kingdom Telecommunications Safety Requirements

This equipment is manufactured to the International Safety Standard EN60950 and

as such is approved in the UK under the General Approval Number
NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect connection to the public telecommunication network.

The network adapter interfaces housed within this equipment are approved
separately, each one having its own independent approval number. These interface
adapters, supplied by the manufacturer, do not use or contain excessive voltages.
An excessive voltage is one which exceeds 70.7 V peak ac or 120 V dc. They
interface with this equipment using Safe Extra Low Voltages only. In order to
maintain the separate (independent) approval of the manufacturer's adapters, it is
essential that other optional cards, not supplied by the manufacturer, do not use
main voltages or any other excessive voltages. Seek advice from a competent
engineer before installing other adapters not supplied by the manufacturer.

viii Service Guide

Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du
Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement

sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets the requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

VCCI Statement

The following is a summary of the VCCI Japanese statement in the box above.

This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used near a
radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio
interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual.

When used near a radio or TV receiver, it may become the cause of radio
interference.

Read the instructions for correct handling.

Radio Protection for Germany

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen EMVG vom
9.Nov.92 das EG–Konformitätszeichen zu führen.

Der Aussteller der Konformitätserklärung ist die IBM Germany.

Dieses Gerät erfüllt die Bedingungen der EN 55022 Klasse B.

Communications Statements ix
x Service Guide
Safety Notices

A danger notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing
death or serious personal injury.

A caution notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing
moderate or minor personal injury.

Electrical Safety

Observe the following safety instructions any time you are connecting or
disconnecting devices attached to the workstation.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous

voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet
is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.

Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power

cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.

When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,

ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before
the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power
cables from the existing system before you add a device.

Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables

to prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different
electrical potentials.

During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations,

printers, telephones, or station protectors for communication lines.

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a three–wire power cable and plug for the user's
safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid
electrical shock.

Preface xi
DANGER

To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from

the electrical outlet before relocating the system.

Unit Emissions

The unit-related emission value is equal to or lower than 70dB(A).

Der Geräuschpegel der Einheit ist kleiner oder gleich 70 db(A).

xii Service Guide

Laser Safety Information
The optical drive in this system unit is a laser product. The optical drive has a label
that identifies its classification. The label, located on the drive, is shown below.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
IEC 825:1984 CENELEC EN 60 825:1991

The optical drive in this system unit is certified in the U.S. to conform to the
requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services 21 Code of Federal
Regulations (DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products. Elsewhere,
the drive is certified to conform to the requirements of the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 825 (1st edition 1984) and CENELEC EN 60
825:1991 for Class 1 laser products.

CAUTION:
A class 3 laser is contained in the device. Do not attempt to operate the drive
while it is disassembled. Do not attempt to open the covers of the drive as it
is not serviceable and is to be replaced as a unit.

Class 1 laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The optical drive
contains internally a Class 3B gallium-arsenide laser that is nominally 30 milliwatts at
830 nanometers. The design incorporates a combination of enclosures, electronics,
and redundant interlocks such that there is no exposure to laser radiation above a
Class 1 level during normal operation, user maintenance, or servicing conditions.

Preface xiii
xiv Service Guide
Environmental Notices

Product Recycling and Disposal

Components of the system unit, such as structural parts and circuit cards, can be
recycled where recycling facilities exist. Companies are available to disassemble,
reutilize, recycle, or dispose of electronic products. Contact your account
representative for more information. This system unit contains batteries and circuit
boards with lead solder. Before you dispose of this unit, these batteries and circuit
boards must be removed and discarded according to local regulations or recycled
where facilities exist. This book contains specific information on each battery type
where applicable.

Battery Return Program

In the United States, IBM has established a collection process for reuse, recycling, or
proper disposal of used IBM batteries and battery packs. For information on proper
disposal of the batteries in this unit, please contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please
have the IBM part number that is listed on the battery available when you make your
call. For information on battery disposal outside the United States, contact your local
waste disposal facility.

Environmental Design

The environmental efforts that have gone into the design of this system signifies
IBM's commitment to improve the quality of its products and processes. Some of
these accomplishments include the elimination of the use of Class I ozone-depleting
chemicals in the manufacturing process and reductions in manufacturing wastes.
For more information, contact an IBM account representative.

Environmental Notices xv
xvi Service Guide
About This Book

This book provides maintenance information that is specific to the system unit,
adapters, and attached devices that do not have their own service information. This
book also contains Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs) that are not common
with other systems. MAPs that are common to all systems are contained in the IBM
RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

This book is used by a service technician to diagnose and repair system failures.
This book assumes that the service technician has had previous training on the 7043
Model 260.

ISO 9000

ISO 9000 registered quality systems were used in the development and
manufacturing of this product.

Related Publications

The following publications provide additional information about your system unit:
Ÿ The 7043 Model 260 User's Guide contains information to help users set up their
system unit, install, configure, and modify options, and solve minor problems.
Ÿ The IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems contains
diagnostic information, service request numbers (SRNs), and failing function
codes (FFCs).
Ÿ The IBM RS/6000 Adapter, Device, and Cable Information for Multiple Bus
Systems contains information about adapters, devices, and cables for your
system. This manual is intended to supplement the service information found in
the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
Ÿ The Site and Hardware Planning Guide contains information to help you plan
your installation.

Trademarks
Ÿ AIX is a registered trademark of the International Business Machines
Corporation.
Ÿ PowerPC is a trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.

Preface xvii
xviii Service Guide
Chapter 1. Reference Information

System Unit Locations

Front View with Media Door Off

CD-ROM Drive

Disk Drives

Diskette Drive

Operator Panel

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-1

Rear View
1 2

4
7
5
6
8 9
10
11
12

13

14

15
16
17
18

19

1-2 Service Guide

1 Power Supply LED
2 Power Supply Test Switch
3 Power Connector
4 Serial Connector S1
5 Serial Connector S2
6 AUI Ethernet Connector
7 Tablet Connector
8 Keyboard Connector
9 Mouse Connector
10 Audio Line Out
11 Audio Line In
12 RJ45 Ethernet Connector
13 Parallel Connector
14 External SCSI Connector
15 PCI Slot 5 (32-bit)
16 PCI Slot 4 (32-bit)
17 PCI Slot 3 (32-bit)
18 PCI Slot 2 (64-bit)
19 PCI Slot 1 (64-bit)

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-3

I/O Board Component Locations
J19 J16 J10

J23 J7

J24 J11
J20 J18 J17
J26
J25

J27

J21

J28

J4

J12

J13

J14
J1
J8
J15
J2
J9
J3

J6 J5

1-4 Service Guide

J1 Operator panel power connector
J2 Operator panel audio connector
J3 PCI fan connector
J4 I/O board connector to system board
J5 VPD module connector
J6 ESP external connector
J7 Internal SCSI connector
J8, J9 64-bit PCI connectors
J10 CD ROM Audio
J11 Battery connector
J12, J13, J14 32-bit PCI connectors
J15 Service processor external connector
J16 Power connector
J17 Diskette drive connector
J18 Tablet connector
J19 Power connector
J20 AUI Ethernet connector
J21 Cec fan connector
J23 Serial port connector
J24 Keyboard/Mouse connector
J25 RJ45 Ethernet connector
J26 Audio in/out
J27 Parallel port connector
J28 External SCSI connector

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-5

SCSI IDs and Bay Locations

1 Bay D2 CD-ROM SCSI ID 1

2 Bay D3 Media device SCSI ID 0
3 Bay D1 Diskette drive Non-SCSI
4 Bay D4 Disk drive SCSI ID 9
5 Bay D5 Disk drive SCSI ID 8

Note: The SCSI bus ID's are the recommended values. Features installed at the
manufacturing site correspond to these IDs. Field installations may not comply with
these recommendations.

1-6 Service Guide

System Board Locations

J8
J7

J6 J5

J3

J2

J1

J1 System board connector to I/O board

J2 Memory card 2 connector
J3 Memory card 1 connector
J5 Power supply connector
J6 Processor card connector #2
J7 Power supply connector
J8 Processor card connector #1

Memory Card Locations

Slot J15 Slot J16
Slot J13 Slot J14
Slot J11 Slot J12

Slot J9 Slot J10

Slot J8
Slot J7
Slot J6
Slot J5
Slot J4
Slot J3
Slot J2
Slot J1

Note: Memory modules must be installed in pairs and in the correct slot
configuration. (Slots J1 and J2, J3 and J4, J5 and J6, etc.)

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-7

Operator Panel
1 2

3
4

5 6 7

1 Power On Switch
2 Reset Switch
3 Power On LED
4 Disk Drive Activity LED
5 Display
6 Headset Receptacle
7 Microphone Receptacle

1-8 Service Guide

System Cables

Power
Power Supply
P1 Audio CD ROM
Fan P2 SCSI

P3 Power
Media
Device
SCSI
P5 P4 J10 Power
Data Diskette
J17 J7
J7 J5
Power
SCSI Op
System Board P6 Panel
Audio
Disk
Drives
J1
J21
Fan J2

J3 Fan
I/O Board

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-9

Service Inspection Guide

Perform a service inspection on the system when:

Ÿ The system is inspected for a maintenance agreement.
Ÿ Service is requested and service has not recently been performed.
Ÿ An alterations and attachments review is performed.
Ÿ Changes have been made to the equipment that may affect the safe operation of
the equipment.
Ÿ External devices with their own power cables have those cables attached.

If the inspection indicates an unacceptable safety condition, the condition must be

corrected before anyone can service the machine.
Note: The correction of any unsafe condition is the responsibility of the owner of the
system.

Perform the following checks:

1. Check the covers for sharp edges and for damage or alterations that expose the
internal parts of the system unit.
2. Check the covers for proper fit to the system unit. They should be in place and
secure.
3. Gently rock the system unit from side to side to determine if it is steady.
4. Set the power switch of the system unit to Off.
5. Remove the covers.
6. Check for alterations or attachments. If there are any, check for obvious safety
hazards such as broken wires, sharp edges, or broken insulation.
7. Check the internal cables for damage.
8. Check for dirt, water, and any other contamination within the system unit.
9. Check the voltage label on the back of the system unit to ensure that it matches
the voltage at the outlet.
10. Check the external power cable for damage.
11. With the external power cable connected to the system unit, check for 0.1 ohm
or less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cable plug and
the metal frame.
12. Perform the following checks on each device that has its own power cables:
a. Check for damage to the power cord.

1-10 Service Guide

 b. Check for the correct grounded power cable.
c. With the external power cable connected to the device, check for 0.1 ohm or
less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cable the
metal frame of the device.
13. Install the covers.

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-11

Specifications

The mechanical packaging, cooling, power supply, and environmental requirements

for the server is shown in the following:

Dimensions
Ÿ With pedestal:
– Height - 615 mm (24.2 inches)
– Depth - 681 mm (26.8 inches)
– Width - 340 mm (13.4 inches)
Ÿ Without pedestal:
– Height - 610 mm (24.0 inches)
– Depth - 681 mm (26.8 inches)
– Width - 221 mm (8.7 inches)

Weight

Configuration dependent

Operating Environment - Class B

Temperature - 16° to 32°C (60° to 90°F)

Humidity - 8% to 80% noncondensing

Maximum Altitude - 2135 m (7000 feet)

Power Source Loading

Typical EMC Configuration - 0.3 kVA

Maximum - 0.5 kVA

Power Requirements

Typical - 275 watts

Maximum - 640 watts

1-12 Service Guide

Power Factor

0.89 - 0.98

Operating Voltage

100 to 127V ac; 50 to 60 Hz

200 to 240V ac; 50 to 60 Hz

Heat Output (Maximum)

Typical - 400 BTU/hr

Maximum - 794 BTU/hr

Acoustics

6.0 Bels operating

5.5 Bels idle

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-13

Power Cables

To avoid electrical shock, a power cable with a grounded attachment plug is

provided. Use only properly grounded outlets.

Power cables used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
These power cords consist of:
Ÿ Electrical cables, Type SVT or SJT.
Ÿ Attachment plugs complying with National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) 5-15P. That is:
"For 115 V operation, use a UL listed cable set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG,
Type SVT or SJT three-conductor cord a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel
blade, grounding type attachment plug rated at 15 A, 125 V."
"For 230 V operation in the United States use a UL listed cable set consisting of a
minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT three-conductor cable a maximum of 15 feet in
length, and a tandem blade, grounding type attachment plug rated at 15 A, 250 V."
Ÿ Appliance couplers complying with International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) Standard 320, Sheet C13.

Power cables used in other countries consist of the following:

Ÿ Electrical cables, Type HD21.
Ÿ Attachment plugs approved by the appropriate testing organization for the
specific countries where they are used.
"For units set at 230 V (outside of U.S.): use a cable set consisting of a minimum 18
AWG cable and grounding type attachment plug rated 15 A, 250 V. The cable set
should have the appropriate safety approvals for the country in which the equipment
will be installed and should be marked HAR'."

Refer to Chapter 8, “ Parts Information” on page 8-1 to find the power cables that
are available.

1-14 Service Guide

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs)

Note: When possible, run Online Diagnostics in Service Mode. Online Diagnostics
perform additional functions, compared to Standalone Diagnostics. This ensures that
the error state of the system is captured in NVRAM for your use in fixing the
problem. The AIX error log and SMIT are only available when diagnostics are run
from the hard drive.

Notes:
1. If more than eight digits are displayed in the operator panel, use only the first
eight digits to find the error in the tables. The digits that display beyond the first
eight digits are location codes that can assist you in diagnosing the problem. See
Chapter 4, “Location Codes” on page 4-1.
2. Licensed programs frequently rely on network configuration, and system
information stored on the VPD on the operator panel control assembly. If the
MAPs indicate that the Operator Panel Control Assembly should be replaced,
swap the VPD from the old operator panel to the new one. If the old VPD
module has to be replaced call technical support for recovery instructions. If
recovery is not possible, notify the system owner that new keys for licensed
programs may be required.
3. If a network adapter, or the I/O board is replaced, the network administrator must
be notified so that the client IP addresses used by the server can be changed.
In addition, the operating system configuration of the network controller may
need to be changed in order to enable system startup. Also check to ensure that
any client or server that addresses this system is updated.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-1

Quick Entry MAP

Use the following table to determine your starting point.

Quick Entry MAP Table of Contents

Problem Description Page No.

Service Actions 2-3
System Stops With an 8-Digit Number Displayed 2-3
System Stops With a 4-Digit Number Displayed 2-3
System Stops With a 3-Digit Number Displayed 2-3
System Stops or Hangs With Alternating Numbers Displayed in the Operator 2-4
Display Panel.
There Appears to be a Display Problem (Distortion, Blurring,Etc.) 2-4
Power and Cooling Problems 2-4
Flashing 888 in Operator Panel Display 2-4
Other Symptoms or Problems 2-5
You Cannot Find the Symptom in this Table 2-8

2-2 Service Guide

Symptom Action

Service Actions
You have parts to exchange or a corrective 1. Go to the Removal and Replacement
action to perform. Procedures.
2. Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the
IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
Multiple Bus Systems.
You need to verify that a part exchange or Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM
corrective action corrected the problem. RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems.
You need to verify correct system operation. Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM
RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems.

System Stops With An 8-Digit Number Displayed

The system stops with an 8-digit error code Record the error code. Go to Chapter 3, “Error
displayed in the operator panel display or on the Code to FRU Index” on page 3-1.
console.

System Stops With An 4-Digit Number Displayed

The system stops and a 4-digit number is If the number displayed begins with the
displayed in the operator panel display or on the character "E0xx" then go to “SP Checkpoints”
console. on page 3-33.
If the number displayed begins with the
characters "E1xx-EFFF", make note of any
location code that is displayed on the second
line of the operator panel. If the location code
indicates a card slot (eg. P2-I3), replace the
card in the indicated slot. If this does not correct
the problem, then go to “Firmware Checkpoints”
on page 3-36.
For all other numbers record SRN 101-xxx,
where xxx is the last three digits of the four-digit
number displayed in the operator panel, then go
to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
Note: If the operator panel displays 2 sets of
numbers, use the bottom set of numbers as the
error code.

System Stops With An 3-Digit Number Displayed

The system stops with an 3-digit number Record SRN 101-xxx, where xxx is the last
displayed in the operator panel display or on the three digits of the four-digit number displayed in
console. the operator panel, then go to the Fast Path
MAP in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information
for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-3

 Symptom Action

System Stops or Hangs With Alternating Numbers Displayed in the Operator Display Panel
The operator panel display alternates between Record both codes. Go to "E1FD" in “Firmware
the code "E1FD" and another "Exxx" code. Checkpoints” on page 3-36.
The operator panel display alternates between Record both codes. Go to "E1DE" in “Firmware
the codes "E1DE" and "E1AD". Checkpoints” on page 3-36.

Display Problem (Blank, Distortion, Blurring, Etc.).

All display problems. 1. If using a graphics display:
a. Go to the Problem Determination
Procedures for the display.
b. If you do not find a problem, replace the
display adapter.
c. If you do not find a problem, suspect the
I/O board. Go to “MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration” on page 2-31.
2. If the problem is with the ASCII terminal:
a. Make sure that the ASCII terminal is
connected to S1.
b. If problems persist, go to the Problem
Determination Procedures for the
terminal.
c. If you do not find a problem,replace the
service processor.
d. If you do not find a problem, suspect the
I/O board. Go to “MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration” on page 2-31.

Power and Cooling Problems

The power LEDs on the operator panel and the Go to “MAP 1520: Power” on page 2-23.
power supply do not start flashing within 30
seconds of AC power application.
The power LEDs on the operator panel and the Go to “MAP 1520: Power” on page 2-23.
power supply do not come on or stay on.
The power LEDs on the operator panel and the Go to “MAP 1520: Power” on page 2-23.
power supply come on and stay on but the
system does not power on.
The cooling fan(s) do not come on or come on Go to “MAP 1520: Power” on page 2-23.
but do not stay on.

Flashing 888 in Operator Panel Display

888 is displayed is displayed in the operator Go to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
panel. Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-4 Service Guide

Symptom Action

Other Symptoms or Problems

You have OK displayed. The service processor is ready. Go to "MAP
0020: Problem Determination Procedure" in the
IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple
Bus Systems.
You have STBY displayed. The Service Processor is ready. The system
was shutdown by the operating system and is
still powered on. This condition can be
requested by a privileged system user with no
faults. See SP error log for possible operating
system fault indications.
The system POST indicators are displayed on Go to “Boot Problems/Concerns” on page 3-47.
the system console, the system pauses and
then restarts. The term "POST indicators" refer
to the icons (graphic display) or device
mnemonics (ASCII terminal) that appear during
the power-on self-test (POST).
The system stops and POST indicators are Go to “MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration” on
displayed on the system console. The term page 2-31 to isolate the problem.
"POST indicators" refer to the icons (graphic
display) or device mnemonics (ASCII terminal)
that appear during the power-on self-test
(POST).
The system stops and the message "STARTING Go to “Checkpoints” on page 3-33.
SOFTWARE PLEASE WAIT..." is displayed on

ASCII terminal, the boot indicator ( ) is

displayed on a graphics terminal.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-5

 Symptom Action
The system does not respond to the password Verify that the password is being entered from
being entered or the system login prompt is the ASCII terminal or keyboard defined as the
displayed when booting in service mode. system console. If so, then the keyboard or its
controller may be faulty.
1. If entering the password from the keyboard
which is attached to the system, replace the
keyboard. If replacing the keyboard does not
fix the problem, replace the I/O board. (See
notes on 2-1.)
2. If entering the password from a keyboard
which is attached to a ASCII terminal, use
the Problem Determination Procedures for
the ASCII terminal. Make sure the ASCII
terminal is connected to S1. Replace the
I/O board if these procedures do not reveal
a problem.
3. If the problem is fixed, go to "MAP 410:
Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems. If the problem persists, go to
“MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration” on
page 2-31 to isolate the problem.
No codes are displayed on the operator panel Reseat the operator panel cable. If the problem
within a few seconds of turning on the system. is not resolved, replace these parts in the
The operator panel is blank before the system is following order:
powered on.
1. Operator panel assembly. Update the VPD
information in the new operator panel.
2. I/O board (See notes on 2-1.)
3. If the problem is fixed, go to "MAP 410:
Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems. If the problem persists, go to
“MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration” on
page 2-31 to isolate the problem.

2-6 Service Guide

Symptom Action
The SMS configuration list or Boot sequence A device may be set to use the same SCSI bus
selection menu shows more SCSI devices ID as the control adapter. Note the ID being
attached to a controller/adapter than are actually used by the controller/adapter (this can be
attached. checked and/or changed via an SMS utility), and
verify that no device attached to the controller is
set to use that ID.
If settings do not appear to be in conflict:
1. Replace the SCSI cable.
2. Replace the device.
3. Replace the SCSI adapter (or I/O board if
connected to one of the two integrated SCSI
controllers on the I/O board). (See notes on
2-1 if the I/O board is replaced.)
Note: In a "Twin-tailed" configuration where
there is more than one initiator device
(normally another system) attached to
the SCSI bus, it may be necessary to
change the ID of the SCSI controller or
adapter with the System Management
Services.
The System Management Services menu is The device or media you are attempting to boot
displayed. from may be faulty.
1. Check the SMS error log for any errors. To
check the error log:
a. Choose error log
b. If an error is logged, check the time
stamp.
c. If the error was logged during the
current boot attempt,record it.
d. Look up the error in “Checkpoints” on
page 3-33 and do the listed action.
e. If no recent error is logged in the error
log, continue to the next step below.
2. Try to boot from an alternate boot device
connected to the same controller as the
original boot device. If the boot succeeds,
replace the original boot device (for
removable media devices try the media first.
3. Go to “MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration”
on page 2-31.
You have a problem that does not prevent the Go to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
system from booting. Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
You have an SRN. Go to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-7

 Symptom Action
You suspect a cable problem. See the IBM RS/6000 Adapter, Device, and
Cable Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
You do not have a symptom. Go to MAP 0020 in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
You do not have a determined symptom. Go to “MAP 1020: Problem Determination” on
page 2-9.

You Cannot Find the Symptom in this Table

All other problems. Go to “MAP 1020: Problem Determination” on
page 2-9.

2-8 Service Guide

MAP 1020: Problem Determination

Purpose of This MAP

Use this MAP to get an error code if you were not provided one by the customer or
you are unable to load diagnostics. If you are able to load the diagnostics, go to
MAP 0020 in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

The Service Processor may have recorded one or more symptoms in its error log. It
is a good idea to examine that error log before proceeding (see Service Processor
System Information Menu).

Be prepared to record code numbers and use those numbers in the course of
analyzing a problem. Go to “Step 1020-1” on page 2-11.

The Service Processor may have been set by the user to monitor server operations
and to attempt recoveries. You may wish to disable these actions while you diagnose
and service the system. If the system was set up according to the recommendations
of the User's Guide, all the settings of the Service Processor (except Language)
were saved by using the SAVE/RESTORE HARDWARE MAINTENANCE POLICIES
Service Aid. You may use that same Service Aid to restore the settings at the end of
your service action.

Just in case the Service Processor settings were not saved by the user, if you
disable them, you should make notes of their current settings for restoration before
you leave.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-9

In addition to the parameters in the table below, you may wish to disconnect the
modem to prevent incoming signals that could cause the system to power on.

Following are the Service Processor settings of your interest. The Service Processor
menus are described in “Service Processor Menus” on page A-3.

Surveillance From the Service Processor Setup Menu, go to

the Surveillance Setup Menu and disable
surveillance.
Unattended Start From the Service Processor System Power
Control Menu, disable unattended start mode.
Reboot Policy From the System Power Control Menu, go to
the Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu and set:
1. Number of reboot attempts to 0 (zero)
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy to No
3. Enable supplemental restart policy to No.
Call Out From the Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu, go to the
Serial Port Selection Menu and disable call-out
on both serial ports.

Another feature that could disrupt a service action by powering the system on is an
AIX function called "Timed Power-On". If you think it should be turned off during your
service action, refer to the "System Power-On Methods" in the System User's Guide:
Operating System and Devices (order number SC23-4126).

2-10 Service Guide

Step 1020-1

The following steps analyze a failure to load the diagnostic programs.

Note: You are asked questions regarding the operator panel display. You are also
asked to perform certain actions based on displayed POST indicators.
Please be observant of these conditions.
1. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off.
3. Turn the power on.
4. When the keyboard indicator is displayed (the word keyboard on an ASCII
terminal or the keyboard icon on a graphical display), press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal.
5. Enter a password, if requested.
6. Wait until the diagnostics are loaded or the system appears to stop.
7. Find your symptom in the following table; then follow the instructions given in the
Action column.

Symptom Action
The diskette LED is blinking rapidly, or EIEA or The flash EPROM data is corrupted. The
EIEB is displayed on the operator panel. recovery procedure for the flash EPROM should
be executed. See “Firmware Recovery” on
page 6-22.
The system stops with a prompt to enter a Enter the password. You are not allowed to
password. continue until a correct password has been
entered. When you have entered a valid
password go to the beginning of this table and
wait for one of the other conditions to occur.
The diagnostic operating instructions are Go to MAP 0020 in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
displayed. Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
The system login prompt is displayed. You may not have pressed the correct key or
you may not have pressed the key soon enough
when you were to indicate a Service Mode IPL
of the diagnostic programs. If this was the case
start over at the beginning of this Step.
Note: Perform the systems shutdown
procedure before turning off the system.
If you are sure you pressed the correct key in a
timely manner, go to “Step 1020-2” on
page 2-13.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-11

 Symptom Action
The system does not respond when the Go to “Step 1020-2” on page 2-13.
password is entered.
The system stopped and a POST indicator is If the POST indicator represents:
displayed on the system console and an
Ÿ memory, record error code M0MEM002.
eight-digit error code is not displayed.
Ÿ keyboard, record error code M0KBD000.
Ÿ SCSI, record error code M0CON000.
Ÿ network, record error code M0NET000.
Ÿ speaker (audio), record error code
M0BT0000.
Go to “Step 1020-3” on page 2-13.
The system stops and a 4-digit number is If the number displayed begins with the
displayed in the operator panel display. character "E0xx" then go to “SP Checkpoints”
on page 3-33. or "E1xx-EFFF" then go to
“Firmware Checkpoints” on page 3-36.
For all other numbers record SRN 101-xxx,
where xxx is the last three digits of the four-digit
number displayed in the operator panel, then go
to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
Note: If the operator panel displays 2 sets of
numbers, use the bottom set of numbers as the
error code.
The System Management Services is displayed. Go to“Step 1020-4” on page 2-14.
All other symptoms. If you were directed here from the Entry MAP,
go to “MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration” on
page 2-31. Otherwise, find the symptom in the
“Quick Entry MAP” on page 2-2.

2-12 Service Guide

Step 1020-2

There is a problem with the keyboard.

Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table; then follow the
instructions given in the Action column.

Keyboard Type Action

Type 101 keyboard (U.S.). Identify by the size of Record error code M0KBD001; then go to
the Enter key. The Enter key is in only one “Step 1020-3.”
horizontal row of keys.
Type 102 keyboard (W.T.). Identify by the size of Record error code M0KBD002; then go to
the Enter key. The Enter key extends into two “Step 1020-3.”
horizontal rows.
Type 106 keyboard. (Identify by the Japanese Record error code M0KBD003; then go to
characters.) “Step 1020-3.”
ASCII terminal keyboard Go to the documentation for this type of ASCII
terminal and continue problem determination.

Step 1020-3

Take the following actions:

1. Find the eight-digit error code in Chapter 3, “Error Code to FRU Index” on
page 3-1.
Note: If the eight-digit error code is not listed in Chapter 3, “Error Code to FRU
Index,” look for it in the following:
Ÿ Any supplemental service manual for the device
Ÿ The diagnostic problem report screen for additional information
Ÿ The Service Hints service aid
Ÿ The CEREADME file (by using the Service Hints service aid). Note: Service
aids can be found in Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
2. Perform the action listed.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-13

Step 1020-4
1. Turn off, then turn on the system unit.
2. When the keyboard indicator appears, press the F1 key on a directly attached
keyboard or the 1 key on an ASCII terminal.
3. When the System Management Services appear, check the error log for any
errors.
Ÿ Choose Error Log
Ÿ If an error is logged, check the time stamp.
Ÿ If the error was logged during the current boot attempt, record it.
Ÿ Look up the error in the Chapter 3, “Error Code to FRU Index” on page 3-1
and do the listed action.
Ÿ If no recent error is logged in the error log, go to “MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration” on page 2-31.

2-14 Service Guide

MAP 1240: Memory Problem Resolution
Note:

The firmware checkpoint that sent you here could be one of the following: E122,
E213, E214, E218, E220 or E3xx.

These checkpoints are referred to as "a memory checkpoint" in this MAP.

Purpose of This MAP

This MAP is used to trouble shoot a problem during the memory test when the
system stops at a memory checkpoint and no error code is displayed on the operator
panel.

Notes:
1. If the symptom changes while using this MAP, check for loose cards, cables, and
obvious problems. If you do not find a problem, go to “MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration” on page 2-31
2. The Service Processor may have recorded one or more symptoms in its error
log. It is a good idea to examine that error log before proceeding (see Service
Processor System Information Menu).
3. The Service Processor may have been set by the user to monitor service
operations and to attempt recoveries. You may wish to disable these actions
while you diagnose and service the system. If you disable them, you should
make notes of their current settings for restoration before you leave. Following
are the settings of your interest.

Surveillance From the Service Processor Setup Menu, go to

the Surveillance Setup Menu and disable
surveillance.
Unattended Start From the Service Processor System Power
Control Menu, disable unattended start mode.
Reboot Policy From the System Power Control Menu, go to
the Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu and set:
1. Number of reboot attempts to 0 (zero)
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy to No
3. Enable supplemental restart policy to No.
Call Out From the Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu, go to the
Serial Port Selection Menu and disable call-out
on both serial ports.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-15

General Memory Information

Be sure to unplug the power cable before removing or installing the memory card(s)
or memory modules to avoid damage to them.

Memory cards can be installed in either slot (or both) on the system board, there is
no requirement that one be installed before the other.

It is perfectly acceptable for there to be two partially populated memory cards in the
system, the first memory card does not have to be fully populated before memory on
the second memory card is useable.

Memory modules, on the other hand, must be installed in matched (size and speed)
pairs. Refer to “Memory Modules” on page 7-14 for labeling of the memory card and
instructions on module removal and installation (do not, however, replace the covers
as directed while troubleshooting this problem). A single memory module pair may be
installed in module slots J1 and J2 (not slots J1 and J3). A second memory module
pair could be installed in module slots J5 and J6 (slots J3 and J4 do not have to be
populated first). Along these same lines, there is no requirement that memory
module slots J1 and J2 be populated before another slot pair.

2-16 Service Guide

Step 1240-1
1. Ensure that the diagnostics and the operating system are shut down.
2. Turn the power off.
3. Remove and re-install any installed memory card(s)
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Re-seating the memory card(s) has corrected the problem.
Go to "Map 0410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES If there is only one memory card installed tag it as "suspect bad" and go
to “Step 1240-7” on page 2-20.
If there are two memory cards installed go to “Step 1240-2.”

Step 1240-2
1. Turn the power off.
2. Remove the memory card from slot J3.
3. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Go to “Step 1240-4” on page 2-18.
YES Go to “Step 1240-3” on page 2-18.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-17

Step 1240-3
1. Turn the power off.
2. Remove the memory card from slot J2.
3. Install the memory card removed from slot J3 in it's original location.
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Tag the memory card you removed from slot J2 "suspect bad" and go to
“Step 1240-7” on page 2-20.
YES Go to “Step 1240-6” on page 2-19.

Step 1240-4
1. Turn the power off.
2. Remove the memory card from slot J2.
3. Install the memory card removed from slot J3 in it's original location.
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Go to “Step 1240-5” on page 2-19.
YES Tag the memory card in slot J3 "suspect bad" and go to “Step 1240-7” on
page 2-20.

2-18 Service Guide

Step 1240-5
1. Turn the power off.
2. Install the memory card removed from slot J2 in it's original location.
3. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Re-seating the memory card(s) has corrected the problem.
Go to "Map 0410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Go to “Step 1240-6.”

Step 1240-6

One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.

1. Turn the power off.
2. Exchange the following FRUs in the order listed.
a. System board
b. Processor card(s)
3. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Go to "Map 0410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Reinstall the original FRU.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
go to “MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration” on page 2-31.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-19

Step 1240-7
1. Turn the power off.
2. Remove all installed memory modules from the memory card you tagged
"suspect bad". Record the position of the memory modules removed so that
when instructed to re-install them they can be installed in their original position.
3. Install one pair of memory modules.
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO If there are no more memory modules to be installed reseating the
memory modules on the memory card has corrected the problem.
If there was more than one pair of memory modules on the memory card
go to “Step 1240-8.”
YES Go to “Step 1240-9” on page 2-21.

Step 1240-8
1. Turn the power off.
2. Install one pair of memory modules.
3. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Repeat this step until all the memory modules are installed and tested.
If all the memory modules have been installed reseating the memory
modules on the memory card has corrected the problem.
Go to "Map 0410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Go to “Step 1240-9” on page 2-21.

2-20 Service Guide

Step 1240-9

The failure may be caused by the last pair of memory modules installed or the
memory card. To isolate the failing FRU, do the following:
1. Turn the power off.
2. Exchange the last memory module pair installed.
3. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Go to “Step 1240-11” on page 2-22.
YES Go to “Step 1240-10.”

Step 1240-10

One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.

1. Turn the power off.
2. Exchange the following FRUs in the order listed.
a. Memory card
b. System board
c. Processor card(s)
3. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Go to "Map 0410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Reinstall the original FRU.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
go to “MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration” on page 2-31.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-21

Step 1240-11

The memory module(s) (may be both) you exchanged in the previous step may be
defective. To isolate the failing memory module, do the following:
1. Turn the power off.
2. Re-install one of the memory modules you exchanged in the previous step.
3. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with a memory checkpoint displayed on the operator
panel?
NO Repeat this step with the second memory module you exchanged in the
previous step.
If both memory modules have been tested go to "Map 0410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems.
YES Replace the memory module.
If you have not tested both memory modules repeat this step with the
second memory module you exchanged in the previous step.
If the symptom did not change and both memory modules have been
exchanged, go to “Step 1240-10” on page 2-21.

2-22 Service Guide

MAP 1520: Power

Notes:
1. This is not a start of call MAP. Use this Power MAP only if you have been
directed here from a MAP step in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
Multiple Bus Systems.
2. The 7043 Model 260 has power LEDs located on the operator panel and the
power supply. When the system is powered off both LEDs should be blinking.
When the system is powered on both LEDs should be on solid.

This procedure is used to locate power problems in system units. If a problem is

detected, this procedure helps you isolate the problem to a failing unit.

Observe the following safety notice during service procedures.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous

voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet
is correctly wired and grounded to prevent and electrical shock.

Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power

cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.

When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,

ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before
the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power
cables from the existing system before you add a device.

Use on hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables to

prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different
electrical potentials.

During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations,

printers, telephones, or station protectors for communication lines.

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a three–wire power cable and plug for the user's
safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid
electrical shock.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-23

DANGER

To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from

the electrical outlet before relocating the system.

Step 1520-1

You may be directed to this MAP for several reasons:

1. There is no indication of activity when the start/stop switch on the operator panel
is pressed. None of the power LEDs light and none of the fans, including the fan
in the power supply, start to turn.
Go to “Step 1520-2.”
2. When the start/stop switch on the operator panel is pressed, the system begins
to power on, but the operator panel power LED and/or the power supply LED do
not stay on."

Step 1520-2
1. Unplug the power cord from the system unit and the power outlet.
2. Check that the external power cord to the system unit has continuity.
3. Check that the power outlet has been wired correctly with the correct voltage.
4. Plug the power cord into the system unit and the power outlet.

Did you find a problem?

NO Go to “Step 1520-3” on page 2-25.
YES Correct the problem. Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM
RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-24 Service Guide

Step 1520-3
1. Unplug the power cord from the system unit.
2. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 7-5.
3. Press and hold the start/stop switch on the operator panel for a few seconds to
discharge the power supply.
4. Unplug the power connectors (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and P6) from the power
supply.
5. Plug the power cord into the system unit.
6. There is a small dark-colored switch on the back of the power supply, near the
back of the system. It is a normally off momentary switch. Press and hold this
switch for a few seconds while observing the fan in the power supply and the
power LED on the power supply.

Does the fan in the power supply turn on and the power LED on the power
supply change from blinking to solid while you hold the switch? (When you let
go of the switch, the system will power down.)
NO Replace the power supply. Go to "Map 0410: Repair Checkout" in the
IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Go to go to “Step 1520-4” on page 2-26.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-25

Step 1520-4

The power supply is working normally.

1. Unplug the power cord from the system unit.
2. Press and hold the start/stop switch on the operator panel for a few seconds to
discharge the power supply.
3. Plug the power connectors (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and P6) into the power supply.
4. Plug the power cord into the system unit.

If a cooling fan won't turn, the system will try to power up and then off when the
start/stop switch on the operator panel is pressed (but not when the switch on the
power supply is pressed and held).

While holding the power supply switch do all the cooling fans turn?
NO Replace the faulty cooling fan. Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the
IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Exchange the operator panel electronics assembly. Go to “Step 1520-5”
on page 2-27.

2-26 Service Guide

Step 1520-5

Press the start/stop switch on the operator panel to turn the power on.

Does the power LED on the operator panel come on and stay on?
NO Reinstall the original operator panel electronics assembly. Go to “Step
1520-6” on page 2-28.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-27

Step 1520-6
1. Unplug the power cord from the system unit.
2. Record the location of all the adapters. Label and record the location of any
cables attached to the adapters. Remove all the adapters.
3. Remove all the memory cards.
4. If two processor cards are installed remove the lower one.
5. Unplug the power cable from the SCSI backplane.
6. Unplug the power cables from all the SCSI devices.
7. Unplug the front and rear cooling fan power connectors.
8. Plug the power cord into the system unit.
9. Press the start/stop switch on the operator panel to turn the power on.

Does the power LED on the operator panel come on and stay on?
NO Go to “Step 1520-7” on page 2-29.
YES Go to “Step 1520-8” on page 2-30.

2-28 Service Guide

Step 1520-7

Either the processor card, system board, I/O board or power supply is defective.

To test each FRU, exchange the FRUs that have not already been exchanged in the
following order:
1. Processor card
2. System board
3. I/O board
4. Power supply.

Press the start/stop switch on the operator panel to turn the power on after each
FRU is exchanged. If the power stays on, the most recently exchanged FRU was
causing the failure.
1. Unplug the power cord from the system unit.
2. Exchange one of the FRUs in the list.
3. Plug the power cord into the system unit.
4. Press the start/stop switch on the operator panel to turn the power on.

Does the power LED on the operator panel come on and stay on?
NO Reinstall the original FRU.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1520-1” on
page 2-24 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-29

Step 1520-8

One of the parts that you removed or disconnected is probably defective. Install or
connect the parts one at a time in the following order to identify the failing part.
1. Processor card
2. Memory card(s)
3. Front cooling fan
4. Rear cooling fan
5. SCSI backplane power cable.
6. SCSI power cable(s), lowest bay to highest bay.
7. Adapter cards, lowest slot to highest slot.

Press the start/stop switch on the operator panel to turn the power on after each part
is installed or connected. If the system does not power on or the power does not
stay on, the most recently installed or connected part is causing the failure.
1. Turn the power off.
2. Unplug the power cord from the system unit.
3. Install or connect one of the parts in the list.
4. Plug the power cord into the system unit.
5. Press the start/stop switch on the operator panel to turn the power on.

Does the power LED on the operator panel come on and stay on?
NO Replace the last part you installed.
Repeat these steps until all the parts have been installed or connected.
If the symptom did not change and all the parts have been installed or
connected call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1520-1” on
page 2-24 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-30 Service Guide

MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration

Notes:
1. Be sure to unplug the power cable before removing or installing processor
card(s), memory card(s), system board or I/O board to avoid damage to them.
2. This MAP assumes that a CD-ROM drive is installed and connected to the
integrated SCSI adapter, and a Diagnostics CD-ROM is available.
3. If a power-on password or privileged-access password is installed, you are
prompted to enter the password before the diagnostic CD-ROM can load.
4. The term "POST indicators" refer to the icons (graphic display) or device
mnemonics (ASCII terminal) that appear during the power-on self-test (POST).
5. The Service Processor may have recorded one or more symptoms in its error
log. It is a good idea to examine that error log before proceeding (see Service
Processor System Information Menu).
6. The Service Processor may have been set by the user to monitor server
operations and to attempt recoveries. You may wish to disable these actions
while you diagnose and service the system. If you disable them, you should
make notes of their current settings for restoration before you leave. Following
are the settings of your interest.

Surveillance From the Service Processor Setup Menu, go to

the Surveillance Setup Menu and disable
surveillance.
Unattended Start From the Service Processor System Power
Control Menu disable unattended start mode.
Reboot Policy From the System Power Control Menu go to the
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu and set:
1. Number of reboot attempts to 0 (zero)
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy to No
3. Enable supplemental restart policy to No.
Call Out From the Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu, go to the
Serial Port Selection Menu and disable call-out
on both serial ports.

Purpose of this MAP

This MAP is used to locate defective FRUs not found by normal diagnostics. For this
procedure, diagnostics are run on a minimally-configured system. If a failure is
detected on the minimally-configured system, the remaining FRUs are exchanged
one at a time until the failing FRU is identified. If a failure is not detected, FRUs are
added back until the failure occurs. The failure is then isolated to the failing FRU.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-31

Step 1540-1
1. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Note: If you cannot insert the diagnostic CD-ROM, go to “Step 1540-2” on
page 2-33.
2. Ensure that the diagnostics and the operating system are shut down.
3. Turn the power off.
4. Turn the power on.
5. When the keyboard indicator is displayed (the word keyboard on an ASCII
terminal or the keyboard and hand icon on a graphical display), press the F5 key
on the directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal.
6. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?

NO Go to “Step 1540-2” on page 2-33.
YES Go to “Step 1540-18” on page 2-52.

2-32 Service Guide

Step 1540-2
1. Turn the power off.
2. If you have not already done so, configure the Service Processor with the
instructions in note 6 on page 2-31 and then return here and continue.
3. Exit Service Processor Menus and remove the power cable.
4. Disconnect all external cables (parallel, serial 1, serial 2, keyboard, mouse,
tablet, ethernet, SCSI, etc.).
5. Remove the side cover.
6. Record the slot numbers of the PCI adapters. Label and record the location of
any cables attached to the adapters. Disconnect any cables attached to the
adapters and remove all the adapters.
7. Remove the second processor card from slot J6 (if present). (If second
processor card removed, ensure first processor card is installed.).
8. Record the slot numbers of the memory modules. Remove all installed memory
modules except for one pair from the first memory card.
Note: Memory modules must be installed in pairs and in the correct slots. For
example, install the pair in J1 and J2.
9. Remove the second memory card from slot J3, if present.
10. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the SCSI connector (J7) on the I/O board.
11. Disconnect the signal and power connectors from the disk drive cage backplane.
12. Remove the disk drive(s) from the disk drive cage.
13. Disconnect the signal and power connectors from all the SCSI devices except
the CD-ROM drive.
14. Disconnect the diskette drive cable from the diskette drive connector (J17) on the
I/O board.
15. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
16. Turn the power on.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-33

Does the system stop with code E1F2, E1F3, STBY or 4BA00830 displayed on
the operator panel?
NO Go to “Step 1540-3” on page 2-35.
YES If a second processor card was removed, go to “Step 1540-4” on
page 2-36.
If the system has only one processor card, go to “Step 1540-5” on
page 2-37.

2-34 Service Guide

Step 1540-3

One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.

If a memory module is exchanged, ensure that the new module is the same size and
speed as the original module.

Turn the power off, remove the power cable, and exchange the following FRUs in
order:
1. Processor card
2. Memory modules in odd numbered slot (J1, J3, J5, etc.)
3. Memory modules in even numbered slot (J2, J4, J6, etc.)
4. Memory card
5. System board
6. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1.)
7. Power supply.

Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).

Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with code E1F2, E1F3, STBY or 4BA00830 displayed on
the operator panel?
NO Reinstall the original FRU.
Repeat the FRU replacement steps until the defective FRU is identified or
all the FRUs have been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-35

Step 1540-4

No failure was detected with this configuration.

1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Reinstall the second processor card.
3. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with code E1F2, E1F3, STBY or 4BA00830 displayed on
the operator panel?
NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged:
1. Processor card (last one installed)
2. System board
3. I/O board (See notes on 2-1.)
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom changed, check for loose cards and obvious problems. If
you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on page 2-32 and
follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to “Step 1540-5” on page 2-37.

2-36 Service Guide

Step 1540-5

No failure was detected with this configuration.

1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Install a pair of memory modules.
3. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with code E1F2, E1F3, STBY or 4BA00830 displayed on
the operator panel?
NO Go to “Step 1540-6” on page 2-38.
YES Repeat this step until all the memory modules are installed and tested.
After all the memory modules are installed and tested, record the
positions of the memory modules in the second memory card. Remove
all of the memory modules from the second memory card except 1 pair.
Repeat this step with the second memory card (if previously installed).
Go to “Step 1540-9” on page 2-41.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-37

Step 1540-6

The failure may be caused by the last pair of memory modules installed or the
memory card. To isolate the failing FRU, do the following:
1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Exchange the last memory module pair installed.
3. Reinstall the power cable.
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with code E1F2, E1F3, STBY or 4BA00830 displayed on
the operator panel?
NO Go to “Step 1540-8” on page 2-40.
YES Go to “Step 1540-7” on page 2-39.

2-38 Service Guide

Step 1540-7

The memory module(s) (may be both) you exchanged in the previous step may be
defective. To isolate the failing memory module, do the following:
1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Re-install one of the memory modules you installed in the previous step.
3. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with code E1F2, E1F3, STBY or 4BA00830 displayed on
the operator panel?
NO Replace the memory module.
If you have not tested both memory modules, repeat this step with the
second memory module you exchanged in the previous step.
If the sympton did not change and both memory modules have been
exchanged, go to “Step 1540-8” on page 2-40.
YES Repeat this step with the second memory module you exchanged in the
previous step.
If both memory modules have been tested, go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-39

Step 1540-8

One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.

1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Exchange the following FRUs the order listed.
a. Memory card
b. System board
c. I/O board (See notes on 2-1.)
d. Power supply.
3. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
4. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with code E1F2, E1F3, STBY or 4BA00830 displayed on
the operator panel?
NO Reinstall the original FRU.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP, and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-40 Service Guide

Step 1540-9
1. Turn the power off.
2. Reconnect the system console.
Notes:
a. If an ASCII terminal has been defined as the system console, attach the
ASCII terminal cable to the to the S1 connector on the rear of the system
unit.
b. If a display attached to a display adapter has been defined as the system
console, install the display adapter and connect the display to it. Plug the
keyboard into the keyboard connector on the rear of the system unit.
3. Turn the power on.
4. If the ASCII terminal or graphics display (including display adapter) are
connected differently than before, the Console Selection screen appears and
requires that a new console be selected.
5. When the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F1 key on the directly
attached keyboard or the number 1 key on an ASCII terminal. This triggers the
SMS.
6. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-41

Is the SMS screen displayed?
NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged:
1. Go to the Problem Determination Procedures (test procedures) for the
device attached to the S1 serial port or the display attached to the
graphics adapter, and test those devices. If a problem is found,
follow the procedures for correcting the problem on that device.
2. Graphics adapter (if installed).
3. Cable (async or graphics).
4. I/O board. (see notes on page 2-1.)
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom changed, check for loose cards and obvious problems. If
you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on page 2-32 and
follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to “Step 1540-10” on page 2-43.

2-42 Service Guide

Step 1540-10
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Plug the SCSI cable into the SCSI connector (J7) on the I/O board.
4. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display)/
5. Turn the power on.
6. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
7. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?

NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged:
1. SCSI cable
2. CD-ROM drive
3. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1.)
4. Processor card
5. Power Supply.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to “Step 1540-11” on page 2-44.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-43

Step 1540-11

The system is working correctly with this configuration. One of the SCSI devices that
you disconnected may be defective.
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Connect the signal and power connectors to one of the SCSI devices (CD-ROM
drive, tape drive, disk drive, etc.). Do not connect the signal and power
connectors to the backplane at this time.
4. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
5. Turn the power on.
6. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
7. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

2-44 Service Guide

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?
NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged.
1. SCSI cable
2. Last SCSI device connected (CD-ROM drive, tape drive, etc)
3. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1).
4. Processor card
5. Power supply.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Repeat this step, adding one SCSI device at a time, until all the SCSI
devices that were attached to the integrated SCSI adapter, except the
backplane, are connected and tested.
Go to “Step 1540-12” on page 2-46.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-45

Step 1540-12

The system is working correctly with this configuration. The backplane may be
defective.
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Connect the signal and power connectors to the backplane.
4. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display)
5. Turn the power on.
6. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
7. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?

NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged.
1. SCSI cable
2. Disk drive cage backplane
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to “Step 1540-13” on page 2-47.

2-46 Service Guide

Step 1540-13

The system is working correctly with this configuration. One of the disk drives that
you removed from the disk cage may be defective.
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Install a disk drive in the disk drive cage.
4. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display)
5. Turn the power on.
6. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
7. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?

NO In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged.
1. Last disk drive installed
2. Disk drive cage backplane
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Repeat this step with the second disk drive (if it was installed).
Go to “Step 1540-14” on page 2-48.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-47

Step 1540-14

The system is working correctly with this configuration. The diskette drive may be
defective.
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Plug the diskette drive cable into the diskette drive connector (J17) on the I/O
board.
4. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display)
5. Turn the power on.
6. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
7. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?

NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged.
1. Diskette drive
2. Diskette drive cable
3. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1).
4. Power supply
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to “Step 1540-15” on page 2-49.

2-48 Service Guide

Step 1540-15

The system is working correctly with this configuration. One of the devices that you
disconnected from the I/O board may be defective.
1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Attach an I/O board device (parallel, serial1, serial2, AUI/RJ45 Ethernet, Ultra-2
SCSI, tablet, keyboard or mouse) that had been removed.
Note: If the FRU you installed requires supplemental media use the Process
Supplemental Media task to load the supplemental media first.
3. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display)
4. Turn the power on.
5. If the Console Selection screen displays, choose the system console.
6. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
7. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?

NO The last device or cable that you attached is defective.
To test each FRU, exchange the FRUs in the following order:
1. Device and cable (last one attached)
2. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1).
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
Go to "Map 0410: Repair Checkout" in theIBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Repeat this step until all of the devices are attached.
Go to “Step 1540-16” on page 2-50.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-49

Step 1540-16

The system is working correctly with this configuration. One of the FRUs (adapters)
that you removed is probably defective.
1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Install a FRU (adapter) and connect any cables and devices that were attached
to it.
Note: If the FRU you installed requires supplemental media use the Process
Supplemental Media task to load the supplemental media first.
3. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display)
4. Turn the power on.
5. If the Console Selection screen is displayed, choose the system console.
6. After the keyboard indicator appears, press the F5 key on the directly-attached
keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
7. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?

NO Go to “Step 1540-17” on page 2-51.
YES Repeat this step until all of the FRUs (adapters) are installed.
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-50 Service Guide

Step 1540-17

The last FRU installed or one of its attached devices is probably defective.
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM disc is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Starting with the last installed adapter, disconnect one attached device and
cable.
4. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display)
5. Turn the power on.
6. If the Console Selection screen is displayed, choose the system console.
7. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
8. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?

NO Repeat this step until the defective device or cable is identified or all the
devices and cables have been disconnected.
If all the devices and cables have been removed, then one of the FRUs
remaining in the system unitis defective.
To test each FRU, exchange the FRUs in the following order:
1. Adapter (last one installed)
2. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1).
3. Power supply
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-32 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES The last device or cable that you disconnected is defective.
Exchange the defective device or cable.
Go to "Map 0410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-51

Step 1540-18
1. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the system console.
2. When the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS screen is displayed,
press Enter.
3. If the terminal type has not been defined, you must use the Initial Terminal option
on the FUNCTION SELECTION menu to initialize the AIX operating system
environment before you can continue with the diagnostics. This is a separate and
different operation than selecting the console.
4. Select Advanced Diagnostics Routines.
5. If the NEW RESOURCE screen displays select an option from the bottom of the
screen.
Note: Adapters or devices that require supplemental media are not shown in
the new resource list. If the system has adapters or devices that require a
supplemental media, select option 1.
6. When the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION screen displays, press Enter.
7. Select All Resources (if you were sent here from “Step 1540-22” on page 2-54,
select the Adapter/Device you loaded from the supplemental media).

Did you get an SRN?

NO Go to “Step 1540-20” on page 2-54.
YES Go to “Step 1540-19” on page 2-53.

2-52 Service Guide

Step 1540-19

Look at the FRU part numbers associated with the SRN.

Have you exchanged all the FRUs that correspond to the failing function
codes?
NO Exchange the FRU with the highest failure percentage that has not been
changed.
Repeat this step until all the FRUs associated with the SRN have been
exchanged or diagnostics run with no trouble found. Run diagnostics after
each FRU is exchanged.
If the I/O board or a network adapter is replaced, see notes on page 2-1.
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-53

Step 1540-20

Does the system have adapters or devices that require supplemental media?
NO Go to “Step 1540-21.”
YES Go to “Step 1540-22.”

Step 1540-21

Consult the PCI adapter configuration documentation for your operating system to
verify that all installed adapters are configured correctly.

Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
Multiple Bus Systems.

If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged, call your
service support person for assistance.

Step 1540-22

Select Task Selection.

Select Process Supplemental Media and follow the on screen instructions to process
the media.

Supplemental media must be loaded and processed one at a time.

Did the system return to the TASKS SELECTION SCREEN after the
supplemental media was processed?
NO Go to “Step 1540-23” on page 2-55.
YES Press F3 to return to the FUNCTION SELECTION screen.
Go to “Step 1540-18” substep 4 on page 2-52.

2-54 Service Guide

Step 1540-23

The adapter or device is probably defective.

If the supplemental media is for an adapter replace the FRUs in the following order:
1. Adapter.
2. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1).

If the supplemental media is for a device replace the FRUs in the following order:
1. Device and any associated cables.
2. The adapter the device is attached to.

Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have been
exchanged.

If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged, call your
service support person for assistance.

If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious problems.
If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on page 2-32 for the new
symptom.

Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-55

Step 1540-24
1. Ensure that the diagnostics and the operating system are shut down.
2. Turn the power off.
3. If you have not already done so, configure the Service Processor with the
instructions from note six in “MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration” on page 2-31
and then return here and continue.
4. Exit Service Processor Menus and remove the power cable.
5. Remove the side cover.
6. Record the slot numbers of the PCI adapters. Label and record the location of
any cables attached to the adapters. Disconnect any cables attached to the
adapters and remove all the adapters.
7. Plug the power cable into a power outlet (and wait for OK on the operator panel
display).
8. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with code 4B2xxx00 or 4B2xxx10 displayed on the
operator panel?
NO Go to “Step 1540-26” on page 2-58.
YES Go to “Step 1540-25” on page 2-57.

2-56 Service Guide

Step 1540-25

One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.

1. Turn the power off, remove the power cable, and exchange the FRUs in the
following order.
a. System board
b. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1).
2. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
3. Turn the power on.

Does the system stop with code 4B2xxx00 or 4B2xxx10 displayed on the
operator panel?
NO Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Re-install the original FRU.
Repeat the FRU replacement steps until the defective FRU is identified or
all the FRUs have been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
go to “Step 1540-2” on page 2-33.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-57

Step 1540-26

The system is working correctly with this configuration. One of the FRUs (adapters)
that you removed is probably defective.
1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable from the power outlet.
2. Install a FRU (adapter) and connect any cables and devices that were attached
to it.
3. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
4. Turn the power on.
5. If the Console Selection screen displays, choose the system console.
6. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Does the system stop with code 4B2xxx00 or 4B2xxx10 displayed on the
operator panel?
NO Repeat this step until all of the FRUs (adapters) are installed, then go to
"MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information
for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Go to “Step 1540-27” on page 2-59.

2-58 Service Guide

Step 1540-27

The last FRU installed or one of its attached devices is probably defective.
1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable from the power outlet.
2. Starting with the last installed adapter, disconnect one attached device and
cable.
3. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
4. Turn the power on.
5. If the Console Selection screen displays, choose the system console.
6. Enter the appropriate password if prompted to do so.

Does the system stop with code 4B2xxx00 or 4B2xxx10 displayed on the
operator panel?
NO The last device or cable that you disconnected is defective.
Exchange the defective device or cable.
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Repeat this step until the defective device or cable is identified or all the
devices and cables have been disconnected.
If all the devices and cables have been removed, then one of the FRUs
remaining in the system is defective.
To test each FRU, exchange the FRUs in the following order:
1. Adapter (last on installed)
2. I/O board (see notes on page 2-1).
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
go to “Step 1540-2” on page 2-33.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-59

2-60 Service Guide
Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index

The Error Code to FRU Index lists error symptoms and possible causes. The most
likely cause is listed first. Use this index to help you decide which FRUs to replace
when servicing the system.

If the codes in the following tables indicate a device which is present more than once
in the system unit, a location code is needed to specify which device generated the
error. Go to “Step 1020-4” on page 2-14 to display the System Management
Services error log and obtain a location code. Location code descriptions can be
found under Chapter 4, “Location Codes” on page 4-1.

Once you have the location code, see Chapter 8, “ Parts Information” on page 8-1
for the part number.

Notes:
1. If more than eight digits are displayed in the operator panel, use only the first
eight digits to find the error in the tables. The digits that display beyond the first
eight digits are location codes that can assist you in diagnosing the problem. See
Chapter 4, “Location Codes” on page 4-1.
2. Licensed programs frequently rely on network configuration, and system
information stored on the VPD on the operator panel. If the MAPs indicate that
the operator panel should be replaced, swap the VPD from the old operator
panel to the new one. If the old VPD module has to be replaced call technical
support for recovery instructions. If recovery is not possible, notify the system
owner that new keys for licensed programs may be required.
3. If a network adapter, or the I/O board is replaced, the network administrator must
be notified so that the client IP addresses used by the server can be changed. In
addition, the operating system configuration of the network controller may need
to be changed in order to enable system startup. Also check to ensure that any
client or server that addresses this system is updated.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, go to “MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration” on page 2-31. unless otherwise indicated in the tables.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is corrected, go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-1

Firmware/POST Error Codes

If you replace FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, go to “MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration” on page 2-31

If you replace FRUs and the problem is corrected, go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems

Table 3-1 (Page 1 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.

Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
20A80xxx Remote initial program load (RIPL)
error.
20A80000 Insufficient information to boot. Verify the IP address.
20A80001 Client IP address is already in use by Change IP address.
other network device.
20A80002 Cannot get gateway IP address. Refer to “Firmware Checkpoints” on
page 3-36 table using code E174.
20A80003 Cannot get server hardware address. Refer to “Firmware Checkpoints” on
page 3-36 table using code E174.
20A80004 Bootp failed. 1. Refer to “Boot Problems/Concerns”
on page 3-47 for general
considerations.
2. Turn off then on, and retry the boot
operation.
3. Verify Boot List by using the
Firmware SMS Multiboot menus.
4. Verify the network connection
(network could be down).
5. Have network administrator verify
the server configuration for this
client.
20A80005 File transmission (TFTP) failed. Check network connection, try again.
20A80006 Image too big. Ran out of available Verify boot server configuration.
firmware memory resources loading
boot image.
20D00xxx Unknown/Unrecognized device
20D0000F Self-test failed on device, no Check the System Management
error/location code information Services error log entry (described in
available. “Step 1020-4” on page 2-14) for this
error code. The location code (if
present) in the error log entry should
identify the location of the failing
device.
20D00010 Self-test failed on device, can't locate Contact you service support
package. representative for assistance.

3-2 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 2 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
20D00011 Cannot determine machine model. The machine model is part of the
System Vital Product Data. Perform
corrective actions listed for errors
2BA00050, 2BA00051.
20E00xxx Security
20E00000 Power on Password entry error. The password has been entered
incorrectly.
Retry installing the password.
20E00001 Privileged-access password entry error. The password has been entered
incorrectly.
Retry installing the password.
20E00002 Privileged-access password jumper not The privileged-access password jumper
enabled. is not in the correct position for
password initial entry.
Consult the system's User's Guide for
jumper location and position.
20E00003 Power on Password must be set for Unattended mode requires the setting
Unattended mode. of the Power On password before it is
enabled.
20E00004 Battery drained or needs replacement. 1. Replace battery.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E00005 EEPROM locked. 1. Turn off, then turn on system unit.
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
20E00008 CMOS corrupted or tampering evident, Check your machine for evidence of
CMOS initialized. tampering.
If no tampering evident:
1. Replace battery, restore NVRAM
data (passwords, startup data).
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E00009 Invalid password entered - system The password has been entered
locked. incorrectly 3 times.
Turn off, then turn on the system unit,
then enter the password correctly.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-3

 Table 3-1 (Page 3 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
20E0000A EEPROM lock problem. If for privileged-access password
install, is jumper in correct position?
Consult the system's User's Guide for
jumper location and position.
1. Turn off, turn on system unit.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E0000B EEPROM write problem 1. Turn off, turn on system unit.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E0000C EEPROM read problem. 1. Turn off, turn on system unit.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E00017 Cold boot needed for password entry. Turn off, turn on system unit.
20EE0xxx Informational
20EE0003 IP parameter requires 3 dots "." Enter valid IP parameter.
Example: 000.000.000.000
20EE0004 Invalid IP parameter. Enter valid (numeric) IP parameter.
Example: 000.000.000.000
20EE0005 Invalid IP parameter (>255) Enter valid (numeric) IP parameter in
the range of 0 to 255.
Example: 255.192.002.000
20EE0006 No SCSI controllers present The I/O board should always have (at
least) 2 integrated PCI SCSI
controllers; replace the I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
20EE0007 Keyboard not found 1. Plug in keyboard.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20EE0008 No configurable adapters found in the This warning occurs when the selected
system. SMS function cannot locate any
devices/adapters supported by the
function. If a supported device is
installed:
1. Replace the device or adapter.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20EE0009 Unable to communicate with the 1. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
service processor. 3-1.)
2. Replace system board.

3-4 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 4 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
20EE000A Pointer to the operating system found Values normally found in non-volatile
in non-volatile storage. storage that point to the location of an
Operating System were not found.
This can happen for two reasons,
either your installed Operating System
doesn't support storing the values or
some event occurred that caused the
system to lose non-volatile storage
information (drainage or replacement of
the battery). If you are running AIX,
this information can be reconstructed
by running the bootlist command
specifying the device that the Operating
System is installed on. Please refer to
your AIX documentation for the exact
syntax and usage of the bootlist
command.
In order to boot the Operating System
so that the above mentioned values
can be reconstructed,power the system
down and power it back up again, this
should cause the system to look for the
Operating System in the devices
contained in the custom boot list or in
the default boot list, depending on the
condition of the system. If this is not
successful, modify the Boot Sequence
(also known as boot list) to include
devices that are known to contain a
copy of the Operating System. This
can be accomplished by using the
System Management Services Menus.
For example, select a hard disk known
to have a copy of the Operating
System as the first and only device in
the boot sequence (boot list) and
attempt to boot again.
20EE000B The system was not able to find an Modify the Boot Sequence (also known
operating system on the device list that as boot list) to include devices that are
was attempted. known to contain a copy of the
Operating System. This can be
accomplished by using the System
Management Services Menus. For
example, select a hard disk known to
have a copy of the Operating System
as the first and only device in the boot
sequence (boot list) and attempt to
boot again.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-5

 Table 3-1 (Page 5 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
21A000xxx SCSI device errors Notes:
1. Before replacing any system
components:
a. Ensure that the controller and
each device on the SCSI bus is
assigned a unique SCSI ID.
b. Ensure SCSI bus is properly
terminated.
c. Ensure SCSI signal and power
cables are securely connected
and not damaged.
2. The location code information is
required to identify the ID of SCSI
device failures as well as to
indicate the location of the
controller to which the device is
attached.
21A00001 Test Unit Ready Failed - hardware Refer to the notes in error code
error. 21A000xxx.
1. Replace the SCSI device.
2. Replace the SCSI cable.
3. Replace the SCSI controller.
21A00002 Test Unit Ready Failed - sense data Refer to the notes in error code
available. 21A000xxx.
1. Replace the media (Removable
media devices).
2. Replace the SCSI device.
21A00003 Send diagnostic failed. Refer to the notes in error code
21A000xxx.
Replace the SCSI device.
21A00004 Send diagnostic failed - DevOfl cmd. Refer to the notes in error code
21A000xxx.
Replace the SCSI device.
21E00xxx SCSI tape Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
21ED0xxx SCSI changer. Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
21EE0xxx Other SCSI device type. Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
21F00xxx SCSI CD-ROM. Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
21F20xxx SCSI Read/Write Optical. Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
22000001 Internal wrap test failed. Replace adapter.

3-6 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 6 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
22001001 Internal wrap test failed. Replace adapter.
22002001 Adapter failed to complete hardware Replace adapter.
initialization.
22010001 Adapter failed to complete hardware Replace adapter.
initialization.
22011001 Adapter failed to complete hardware Replace adapter.
initialization.
25000000 Memory controller failed. Replace the system board.
25010xxx Flash Update Problem
25010000 No diskette in drive. Insert diskette containing firmware
image.
25010001 Diskette seek error. 1. Retry function.
2. Replace diskette drive.
3. Replace diskette cable.
4. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25010002 Diskette in drive does not contain an Insert diskette with firmware update file.
*.IMG file.
25010003 Cannot open OPENPROM package. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25010004 Cannot find OPENPROM node. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25010006 System id does not match image Make sure correct firmware update
system id. diskette is being used with this system.
25010007 Image has bad CRC. Replace firmware updated diskette.
25010008 Flash is write protected, update 1. Turn off, turn on system unit and
cancelled. retry.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25010009 Flash module is unsupported or not Make sure correct firmware update
recognized. diskette is being used with this system.
2501000A Flash write protected. 1. Turn off, turn on system unit, retry.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25A0xxx0 L2 Cache controller problem. 1. Replace the processor card.
2. Replace the system board.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.
25A0xxx1 L2 Cache controller problem. 1. Replace the processor card.
2. Replace the system board.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-7

 Table 3-1 (Page 7 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
25A1xxx1 L2 SRAM failure Replace the processor card.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.
25A80xxx NVRAM problems NVRAM problem resolution:
1. Errors reported against NVRAM
can be caused by low Battery
voltage and (more rarely) power
outages that occur during normal
system usage. With the exception
of the 25A80000 error, these errors
are warnings that the NVRAM data
content had to be re-established
and do not require any FRU
replacement unless the error is
persistent. When one of these
errors occurs, any system
customization (eg. boot device list)
information has been lost, the
system may need to be
re-configured.
2. If the error is persistent, replace
the battery.
3. If the error is persistent after
battery replacement, or the error
code is 25A80000, replace the I/O
board. (See notes on 3-1.)
25A80000 Initialization failed, device test failed. Refer to Action under error code
25A80xxx.
25A80001 Init-nvram invoked, ALL of NVRAM Refer to Action under error code
initialized. 25A80xxx.
25A80002 Init-nvram invoked, some data Refer to Action under error code
partitions may have been preserved. 25A80xxx.
25A80011 Data corruption detected, ALL of Refer to Action under error code
NVRAM initialized. 25A80xxx.
25A80012 Data corruption detected, some data Refer to Action under error code
partitions may have been preserved. 25A80xxx.
25A80100 NVRAM data validation check failed. Turn off, turn on system unit and retry
the operation before replacing any
system component. Refer to Action
under error code 25A80xxx.
25A80201 Unable to expand target partition while Refer to Action under error code
saving configuration variable. 25A80xxx.
25A80202 Unable to expand target partition while Refer to Action under error code
writing error log entry. 25A80xxx.

3-8 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 8 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
25A80203 Unable to expand target partition while Refer to Action under error code
writing VPD data. 25A80xxx.
25A80210 Setenv/$Setenv parameter error - name Refer to Action under error code
contains a null character. 25A80xxx.
25A80211 Setenv/$Setenv parameter error - value Refer to Action under error code
contains a null character. 25A80xxx.
25AA0xxx EEPROM problems. EEPROM problem resolution:
1. Ensure that the EEPROM Security
jumper is in the correct position if
doing a privileged-access password
install.
2. Retry the operation.
3. If retries do not solve the problem,
replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
25AA0000 Unable to unlock EEPROM. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0001 Read-Recv error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0002 Read-Trans error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0003 Write-enable error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0004 Write-recv error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0005 Write-disable error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0006 Write-Trans error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0007 Unable to lock EEPROM. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25B00001 No memory modules detected in either 1. Reseat any installed memory
memory card 1 or 2. card(s) and retry.
2. Reseat any installed memory
modules on the installed memory
cards.
3. Replace Memory Card(s).

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-9

 Table 3-1 (Page 9 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
Memory Errors
Use the location code obtained from the SMS Error Log utility (described in “Step 1020-4” on
page 2-14) to identify which memory module (or memory module pair) the error is reported against.
Memory error codes are in the form 25Cyyxxx where yy indicates Memory &memdimm. PD-bits and
xxx indicates the last 3 digits of the error code.
See “Memory PD Bits” on page 3-29 for information on how to interpret PD bits.

25Cyy001 Memory module is not supported. Replace unsupported memory module.

Note:
Memory module must be replaced with
a supported type memory module. If
an unsupported memory module is
replaced the same unsupported type,
the error does not go away.
There may be 2 memory module
related memory errors reported to
indicate a memory module pair. One
of the 2 indicated memory modules
may be good, when replacing memory
replace 1 memory module at a time,
not both.
See “Memory PD Bits” on page 3-29
for definition of "yy".
25Cyy002 Memory module fails memory test. 1. Replace memory module.
2. Replace memory card.
3. Replace the system board.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-29 for definition of "yy".
25Cyy003 PD bits are mis-matched or missing 1. Make sure both memory modules
one memory module. in the pair are the same type.
2. Replace system board.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-29 for definition of "yy".
25Cyy004 Memory modules are disabled. Remove this unused memory module.
See “Memory PD Bits” on page 3-29
for definition of "yy".
25Cyy005 Memory module failed address test. 1. Replace memory module.
2. Replace memory card.
3. Replace system board.
4. Replace processor card.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-29 for definition of "yy".

3-10 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 10 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
25Cyy006 Memory module failed inter-extent test. 1. Replace system board.
2. Replace processor card.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-29 for definition of "yy".
25Cyy007 Memory module failed extent access 1. Replace system board.
test. 2. Replace processor card.
See “Memory PD Bits” on page 3-29
for definition of "yy".
25Cyy008 Memory module has been 1. Replace memory module.
deconfigured.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-29 for definition of "yy".
26020001 Invalid PCI adapter vendor ID. 1. Move adapter to another slot
(behind a different PCI bridge).
2. Check for available firmware
updates for adapter. Apply update
if available.
3. Run AIX diagnostics on adapter.
Replace if indicated.
4. Replace adapter.
5. Check for system firmware
updates. Apply if update available.
6. Replace power supply.
7. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
26020002 Invalid PCI adapter device ID. 1. Move adapter to another slot
(behind a different PCI bridge).
2. Check for available firmware
updates for adapter. Apply update
if available.
3. Run AIX diagnostics on adapter.
Replace if indicated.
4. Replace adapter.
5. Check for system firmware
updates. Apply if update available.
6. Replace power supply.
7. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-11

 Table 3-1 (Page 11 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
26020003 Invalid PCI adapter class code. 1. Move adapter to another slot
(behind a different PCI bridge).
2. Check for available firmware
updates for adapter. Apply update
if available.
3. Run AIX diagnostics on adapter.
Replace if indicated.
4. Replace adapter.
5. Check for system firmware
updates. Apply if update available.
6. Replace power supply.
7. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
26020007 Failed to allocate bus resources to PCI 1. Move adapter to another slot
adapter. (behind a different PCI bridge).
2. Check for available firmware
updates for adapter. Apply update
if available.
3. Run AIX diagnostics on adapter.
Replace if indicated.
4. Replace adapter.
5. Check for system firmware
updates. Apply if update available.
6. Replace power supply.
7. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
26800Cxx Machine Check occurred. If the location code shown on the
operator panel identifies a card slot:
1. Replace the adapter in the slot
identified.
2. Replace the I/O board (See notes
on 3-1.)
If the location code shown does not
identify a card slot, or if there is no
location code, replace the I/O board.
(See notes on 3-1.)

3-12 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 12 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
28030xxx RTC errors 1. Errors reported against the Real
Time Clock (RTC) can be caused
by low battery voltage and (more
rarely) power outages that occur
during normal system usage.
These errors are warnings that the
RTC data content needs to be
re-established and do not require
any FRU replacement unless the
error is persistent. When one of
these errors occurs, the Power On
Password and Time and Date
information has been lost.
Ÿ To set/restore a Power On
Password, use the SMS utility.
Ÿ To set/restore the Time and
Date, use the Operating
System facility.
2. If the error is persistent, replace
the battery.
3. If the error is persistent after
battery replacement, replace the
I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
28030001 RTC initialization required- RTC not Refer to Action under error code
updating, corrected. 28030xxx.
28030002 Bad time/date values 1. Set the time and date.
2. Refer to Action under error code
28030xxx.
29000002 Keyboard/Mouse controller failed Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
self-test. 3-1.)
29A00003 Keyboard not present/detected. 1. Keyboard
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
29A00004 Keyboard stuck key test failed. 1. Keyboard
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
29B00004 Mouse not present/detected. 1. Mouse
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-13

 Table 3-1 (Page 13 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2B2xxx22 Processor disabled. Processor card.
Where xxx indicates the processor type
as follows:
651 200 Mhz Processor with
1MB of L2 cache.
654 200 Mhz Processor with
4MB of L2 cache.
2B2xxx31 Processor failed. Processor card.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.
2B2xxx42 Unsupported processor type. Processor card.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.
2B200402 Unsupported processor. Processor card.
2BA00xxx Service processor
2BA00000 Service processor POST failure. 1. Unplug the system power cable
and wait until the system power
indicator remains off and the
operator panel is blank.
2. Plug the system power cable back
in and retry the operation.
3. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00012 Service processor reports self-test 1. Unplug the system power cable
failure. and wait until the system power
indicator remains off and the
operator panel is blank.
2. Plug the system power cable back
in and retry the operation.
3. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00013 Service processor reports bad NVRAM 1. If problem persists, replace battery.
CRC. 2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00014 Service processor reports bad service Use service processor firmware
processor firmware. diskette to re-program firmware.
2BA00017 Service processor reports bad or low 1. Replace the battery.
battery. 2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00018 EPOW test failure. 1. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00019 IRQ13 test failure. Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)

3-14 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 14 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00024 Service processor reports bad power Use the system firmware diskette to
controller firmware. re-program the system firmware.
2BA00040 Service processor reports service 1. Use the service processor firmware
processor VPD module not present. diskette to re-program the service
processor firmware.
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00041 Service processor VPD is corrupted. 1. Use the service processor firmware
diskette to re-program the service
processor firmware.
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00050 Service processor reports system Replace the operator panel control
operator panel VPD module not present assembly. (See notes on 3-1.)
or not recognizable.
Note: Swap the old VPD module from
the old operator panel control assembly
to the new one.
2BA00051 System operator panel VPD data Replace the operator panel control
corrupted. assembly. (See notes on 3-1.)
Note: Swap the old VPD module from
the old operator panel control assembly
to the new one.
2BA00060 Service processor reports I/O board Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
VPD module not present. 3-1.)
2BA00061 Service processor reports I/O board Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
VPD data corrupted. 3-1.)
2BA00062 Service processor reports system board Replace the system board.
VPD module not present.
2BA00063 Service processor reports system board Replace the system board.
VPD data corrupted.
2BA00070 Service processor reports processor Replace the processor card(s).
card VPD module not present.
2BA00071 VPD data corrupted for processor card Replace the processor card in slot 0.
in slot 0.
2BA00073 VPD data corrupted for processor card Replace the processor card in slot 1.
in slot 1.
2BA00100 Service processor firmware recovery 1. Check diskette media write protect
information could not be written to tab.
diskette. 2. Replace the diskette drive.
2BA00102 No service processor update diskette in Insert the diskette.
drive.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-15

 Table 3-1 (Page 15 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00103 Service processor firmware update file 1. Obtain new service processor
is corrupted, update cancelled. firmware diskette.
2. Retry operation.
2BA00104 Service processor firmware update file 1. Obtain new level of service
is the same level as the service processor firmware.
processor firmware, update cancelled. 2. Retry operation.
2BA00200 Service processor firmware update Service processor firmware update
error occurred, update not completed. error recovery procedure:
Error occurred during service processor 1. Turn the system Off.
flash write operation. 2. Unplug power cable and then plug
power cable back in.
3. Turn the system On.
4. Retry operation. If problem
persists, replace service processor.
2BA00201 Service processor firmware update See error code 2BA00200 for recovery
error occurred, update not completed. procedure.
Error occurred while reading service
processor CRC.
2BA00202 Service processor firmware update See error code 2BA00200 for recovery
error occurred, update not completed. procedure.
Error occurred while verifying service
processor CRC.
2BA00203 Service processor firmware update See error code 2BA00200 for recovery
error occurred, update not completed. procedure.
Error occurred while reading new
service processor CRC after updating
service processor firmware.
2BA00204 Service processor firmware update See error code 2BA00200 for recovery
error occurred, update not completed. procedure.
Error occurred while calculate CRC
write.
2BA00300 Service processor reports slow fan 1. Replace fan 1.
number 1. 2. If problem persists, replace power
supply.
3. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00301 Service processor reports slow fan 1. Replace fan 2.
number 2. 2. If problem persists, replace power
supply.
3. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)

3-16 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 16 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00309 Service processor reports generic 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
cooling alert. to the system.
2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00310 Service processor reports processor 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
card over temperature alert. to the system.
2. If the problem persists, replace
processor card.
2BA00311 Service processor reports IO over 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
temperature alert. to the system.
2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00312 Service processor reports memory over 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
temperature alert. to the system.
2. Replace memory card.
2BA00313 Service processor reports generic 1. Replace power supply.
power alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00314 Service processor reports 5V over 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00315 Service processor reports 5V under 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00316 Service processor reports 3.3V over 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00317 Service processor reports 3.3V under 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00318 Service processor reports 2.5V over 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00319 Service processor reports 2.5V under 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00320 Service processor reports +12V over 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00321 Service processor reports +12V under 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-17

 Table 3-1 (Page 17 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00322 Service processor reports -12V over 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00323 Service processor reports -12V under 1. Replace power supply.
voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00324 Service processor reports 5V standby 1. Replace power supply.
over voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00325 Service processor reports 5V standby 1. Replace power supply.
under voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00326 Service processor reports PCI 1. Replace power supply.
expansion card 5V over voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00327 Service processor reports PCI 1. Replace power supply.
expansion card 5V under voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00328 Service processor reports PCI 1. Replace power supply.
expansion card 3.3V over voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00329 Service processor reports PCI 1. Replace power supply.
expansion card 3.3V under voltage 2. Replace system board. (See notes
alert. on 3-1.)
2BA00330 Service processor reports PCI 1. Replace power supply.
expansion card +12V over voltage 2. Replace system board. (See notes
alert. on 3-1.)
2BA00331 Service processor reports PCI 1. Replace power supply.
expansion card +12V under voltage 2. Replace system board. (See notes
alert. on 3-1.)
2BA00332 Service processor reports PCI 1. Replace power supply.
expansion card -12V over voltage alert. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00333 Service processor reports PCI 1. Replace power supply.
expansion card -12V under voltage 2. Replace system board. (See notes
alert. on 3-1.)
2BA00334 Service processor reports generic slow 1. Replace power supply.
shutdown request. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)

3-18 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 18 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00335 Service processor reports processor 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
card critical over temperature slow to the system.
shutdown request. 2. Check fans for obstructions that
prevent them from normal
operation (example: a cable caught
in the fan preventing it from
spinning).
3. If problem persists, replace I/O
board.
2BA00336 Service processor reports IO critical 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
over temperature slow shutdown to the system.
request. 2. Check fans for obstructions that
prevent them from normal
operation (example: a cable caught
in the fan preventing it from
spinning).
3. If problem persists, replace system
board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2BA00337 Service processor reports memory 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
critical over temperature slow shutdown to the system.
request. 2. Check fans for obstructions that
prevent them from normal
operation (example: a cable caught
in the fan preventing it from
spinning)
3. If problem persists, replace
memory card.
2BA00338 Service processor reports generic fast 1. Replace power supply.
shutdown request. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00340 Service processor reports locked fan - 1. Replace fan 1.
fast shutdown request fan number 1. 2. If problem persists, replace power
supply.
3. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00341 Service processor reports locked fan - 1. Replace fan 2.
fast shutdown request fan number 2. 2. If problem persists, replace power
supply.
3. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00350 Service processor reports generic 1. Replace power supply.
immediate shutdown request. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00351 Service processor reports generic AC 1. Replace power supply.
power loss EPOW. 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-19

 Table 3-1 (Page 19 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00352 Service processor reports loss of AC 1. Replace power supply.
power (outlet). 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00353 Service processor reports loss of AC 1. Replace power supply.
power (power button). 2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00399 Service processor reports unsupported 1. Check EPOW cabling on SCSI or
value in EPOW. SSA Backplanes.
2. Replace system board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
40100005 A loss of system power detected. Possible main power loss. If not,
replace power supply.
40100007 Immediate shutdown. Possible main power loss. If not,
replace power supply.
40110001 Power supply failed. 1. Check power cable to connector on
I/O Board.
2. Power supply.
3. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
40110002 Voltage not detected on either Replace power supply.
processor card.
40110003 Voltage not detected on one processor Replace processor card.
card. (If the system is running, refer to
the AIX error log to find out which
processor card is failing. If the system
is not running, refer to the service
processor error log.)
40110004 Low voltage detected in power supply 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
40110005 Fan warning detected in power supply 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
40110006 Fan failure detected in power supply 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
40110007 Thermal warning detected in power 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
supply main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
40110008 Thermal failure detected in power 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
supply main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
40110009 High 5.0 volt detected in power supply 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.

3-20 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 20 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4011000A High 5.0 RA volt detected in power 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
supply main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
4011000B High 5.0 RB volt detected in power 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
supply main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
4011000C High 3.3 M volt detected in power 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
supply main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
4011000D High 3.3 volt detected in power supply 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
4011000E High +12.0 volt detected in power 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
supply main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
4011000F High -12.0 volt detected in power 1. Check I2C cable to connector on
supply main enclosure. I/O board.
2. Power supply.
40111002 An unknown power problem detected. Power supply.
40111022 A high 5.0 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. Processor card.
40111032 A high 3.3 voltage reading detected. 1. Processor card.
2. Power supply.
40111052 A high +12 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
40111062 A high −12 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
40111072 A high +5 standby voltage reading 1. Processor card.
detected. 2. Power supply.
40111082 A low 5.0 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
40111092 A low 3.3 voltage reading detected. 1. Processor card.
2. Power supply.
401110B2 A low +12 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
401110C2 A low −12 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
401110D2 A low +5 standby voltage reading 1. Processor card.
detected. 2. Power supply.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-21

 Table 3-1 (Page 21 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
40111101 Power good signal low on either Replace failing processor card
processor card 1 or processor card 2.
(If the system is running, refer to the
AIX error log to find out which
processor card is failing. If the system
is not running, refer to the service
processor error log.)
40111102 Wrong processor cards plugged into 1. Remove cards
the system. 2. Verify part numbers
3. Install valid cards
40111103 Real cpu 5 volt fail. 1. Remove cards
2. Verify part numbers
3. Install valid cards
40200001 An unknown cooling problem detected. Cooling problem; check system fans.
40200021 A processor card temperature warning Over temperature on processor card.
detected.
40200023 A critical processor card temperature Critical temperature on processor card.
condition detected.
40200031 An I/O board temperature warning Over temperature on I/O board.
detected.
40200033 A critical I/O board temperature Critical temperature on I/O board.
condition detected.
40200051 A inlet temperature warning detected. Over temperature on the Air Flow Inlet.
40200053 A inlet memory temperature condition Critical temperature on the Air Flow
detected. Inlet.
40210011 A slow fan detected. Check:
1. Room operating temperature.
2. System fans.
40210014 1. A stopped fan detected. 1. Check connector
2. Fan connector unplugged. 2. Replace failing fan.
3. Fan sensor defective.
40A00000 System firmware IPL failure. 1. Surveillance mode control is from
the Service Processor Menus.
2. Verify that the system firmware
supports service processor
surveillance.
3. Processor card.
4. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
5. If the problem persists, call the
support center for assistance.

3-22 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 22 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
40B00000 The operating system surveillance 1. Surveillance mode control is from
interval exceeded. the Service Processor Menus.
2. Verify that the Operating System
(OS) Heartbeat Utility is installed
and has been activated.
3. Check for errors or unusual
conditions that might prevent the
OS from reporting Heartbeat
messages; such as system dump,
machine check or checkstop error.
Review the error log.
4. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
5. If the problem persists, call the
support center for assistance.
40D00003 An unknown slow shutdown Critical cooling problem. Check to
commanded. ensure the temperature is in the
ambient range.
40D00004 An unknown fast shutdown Locked fan failure detected. Make sure
commanded. all fans are operating normally.
40D00101 Bist on I/O board failed. Replace I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
40D00102 BIST on system board fail. Replace system board.
45800000 Memory controller checkstop. 1. Replace system board.
2. If problem is not resolved, go to
MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration,
“Step 1540-22” on page 2-54.
45C00000 Memory checkstop. (Uncorrectable 1. Attempt to reboot the system in
memory error.) Service mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successsful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
2. Replace system board.
48800909 System vpd error. 1. Check cable to op-panel.
2. Replace op-panel.
3. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
4880090A Generic vpd error. Go to “Step 1540-22” on page 2-54.
4880090B Error identifying system type using vpd. 1. I2C bus error.
2. Call for support.
4880090C Jtag unable to confirm system type 1. Remove cards.
using system vpd. 2. Verify part numbers.
3. Install valid cards.
4. Call for support.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-23

 Table 3-1 (Page 23 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4B2xxx00 Checkstop 1. Press enter on an attached ASCII
terminal keyboard to go into the
Service Processor menus.
2. Select System Information Menu.
3. Select "Read Progress Indicators
from Last System Boot" and use
the posted code indicated by the
arrow. Refer to “Service Processor
Menus” on page A-3 if you need
help. If the code is "E105" or
"0xxx", where xxx is any 3 digits ,
continue to step 4 instead of the
listed action. Otherwise, find the
code in the “SP Checkpoints” on
page 3-33 or “Firmware
Checkpoints” on page 3-36 and
perform the action shown there.
4. Attempt to reboot the system in
Service Mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
Otherwise continue.
5. Remove processor card in slot 2 (if
installed) and see if the problem is
resolved. If problem is resolved
replace processor card. If not,
continue.
6. Exchange processor card in slot 1
with processor card removed from
slot 2 in step 1 (replace processor
card if only one processor card is
exists) and see if the problem is
resolved. If problem is resolved
replace processor card. If not,
continue.
7. Go to MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.

3-24 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 24 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4B2xxx01 Checkstop - Slot 1 Fail 1. Attempt to reboot the system in
Service Mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
Otherwise continue.
2. Processor card in Slot 1
3. System board
4. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
4B2xxx02 Checkstop - Slot 2 Fail 1. Attempt to reboot the system in
Service Mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
Otherwise continue.
2. Processor card in Slot 2
3. System board
4. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-25

 Table 3-1 (Page 25 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4B2xxx10 Machine Check - 0 1. Attempt to reboot the system in
Service Mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
Otherwise continue.
2. Remove processor card in slot 2 (if
installed) and see if the problem is
resolved. If problem is resolved
replace processor card. If not,
continue.
3. Exchange processor card in slot 1
with processor card removed from
slot 2 in step 1 (replace processor
card if only one processor card is
exists) and see if the problem is
resolved. If problem is resolved
replace processor card. If not,
continue.
4. Go to MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-24” on
page 2-56.
4B2xxx11 Machine Check - 1 (Stuck Active) 1. Remove processor card in slot 2 (if
installed) and see if the problem is
resolved. If problem is resolved
replace processor card. If not,
continue.
2. Exchange processor card in slot 1
with processor card removed from
slot 2 in step 1 (replace processor
card if only one processor card is
exists) and see if the problem is
resolved. If problem is resolved
replace processor card. If not,
continue.
3. Replace system board.
4B2xxx41 ABIST fail 1. Processor card in Slot 1.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4B2xxx42 ABIST fail 1. Processor card in Slot 2.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4B2xxx51 LBIST fail 1. Processor card in Slot 1.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)

3-26 Service Guide

Table 3-1 (Page 26 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4B2xxx52 LBIST fail 1. Processor card in Slot 2.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4B200043 Service processor reports JTAG fail 1. Remove processor card in slot 2 (if
installed) and see if the problem is
resolved. If not, proceed to step 2.
2. Exchange processor card in slot 1
with processor card removed from
slot 2 in step 1 (replace processor
card if only one processor card
exists) and see if the problem is
resolved. If not, proceed to step 3.
3. Replace system board.
4. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
4B200055 No processor found. 1. If only one processor card is used,
it must be in slot #1.
2. If two processor cards are being
used, replace the card in slot #1.
4B200056 No processor card in first slot. 1. If only one processor card is used,
it must be in slot #1.
2. If two processor cards are being
used, replace the card in slot #1.
4B200057 The processor cards are not compatible 1. Remove cards
with each other.
2. Verify part numbers
3. Install valid cards.
4B200058 Compatibility test on processor card 0 1. Remove cards
failed.
2. Verify part numbers
3. Install valid cards.
4B200059 Compatibility test on processor card 1 1. Remove cards
failed.
2. Verify part numbers
3. Install valid cards.
4B201020 TEA Error Go to MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.
4BA00000 The system support controller detects Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
the service processor, but cannot 3-1.)
establish communication. The system
halts.
4BA00001 The system support controller cannot Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
detect the service processor. 3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-27

 Table 3-1 (Page 27 of 27). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4BA00800 Unknown error. Check level of Service Processor, if not
the latest and problem persists, call for
support.
4BA00826 Service processor cannot call home. Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
4BA00827 Flash update diskette fail. Replace the diskette drive.
4BA00828 Flash update (crc) checksum fail. Replace the flash image.
4BA00829 Bad system firmware. Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
4BA00830 Boot fail. Go to “Boot Problems/Concerns” on
page 3-47.
4BA10001 SSC sram fail Go to MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.
4BA10002 SSC sram fail Update firmware.
4BA10003 Service processor fail. Replace I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4BA10004 Service processor firmware fail. Restore or update the service
processor Flash EPROM.
4BA10005 IòC Path Fail. 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Processor card.
3. System board.
4BA80013 NVRAM Go to MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.
4BA80014 NVRAM (crc) checksum fail. Recoverable temporary condition,
unless succeeded by 4BA80015.
4BA80015 NVRAM reintialization fail. Replace NVRAM module.

3-28 Service Guide

Memory PD Bits

The following table expands the firmware error code 25Cyyxxx on page 3-9, where
yy is the PD values in the table below and xxx are the last three digits of the error
code. Use these values to identify the type of memory that generated the error.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, go to “MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration” on page 2-31 unless otherwise indicated in the tables.

Table 3-2. Memory Module PD bits

PD Clock Cycle Parity/
value Size (nsecs) ECC
28 512MB 10 ECC
2A 512MB 8 ECC
38 128MB 10 ECC
3A 128MB 8 ECC
48 64MB 10 ECC
4A 64MB 8 ECC
58 32MB 10 ECC
5A 32MB 8 ECC
68 256MB 10 ECC
6A 256MB 8 ECC

Note: Memory modules must be installed in pairs.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-29

Bus SRN to FRU Reference Table

This table is used to locate defective FRUs within the I/O board PCI and ISA buses.
The table indicates which devices should be tested for each SRN. For this
procedure, if possible, diagnostics are run on the I/O board bus devices with all
adapters removed from the failing bus. If a failure is detected on this system with all
adapters removed from the failing bus, the I/O board is the isolated FRU. If a failure
is not detected, the adapters are added back one at a time, to their original slot
location, and the configuration is tested until a failure is detected. The failure is then
isolated to the failing FRU.

If a failure has not been detected and all the FRUs have been tested call your
technical service support person for assistance.

Table 3-3. Bus SRN to FRU Reference Table

SRN Bus Possible Failing Device and AIX Associated
Identification Location Code FRU
9CC-100 PCI Bus 00 Internal SCSI port 1 (10-60) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Internal/External SCSI port 2 (30-58) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Internal Ethernet port (10-80) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Device installed in I/O Slot 3P (10-68 Adapter
to 10-6F)
Device installed in I/O Slot 4P (10-70 Adapter
to 10-77)
Device installed in I/O Slot 5P (10-78 Adapter
to 10-7F)
9CC-101 PCI Bus 01 Device installed in I/O Slot 1P (20-58 Adapter
to 20-5F)
Device installed in I/O Slot 2P (20-60 Adapter
to 20-67)
651-730 ISA Bus Diskette Drive port/device I/O board. (See
(01-D1-00-00) notes on 3-1.)
Parallel port/device (01-R1) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Serial ports (1-2)/device (01-S1 to I/O board. (See
01-S2) notes on 3-1.)
Mouse port/device (01-K1-01-00) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Keyboard port/device (01-K1-00-00) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Audio port/device (01-FF) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Tablet port/device (01-FF) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)

3-30 Service Guide

Typical Boot Sequence for 7043 Model 260

After the A/C power is turned on, the System Support Controller (SSC) startup
begins, and releases reset to the service processor. If the SSC cannot communicate
with the service processor , the LCD displays 4BA00000. If the service processor is
not present, the LCD displays 4BA00001.
1. Service processor self test
Ÿ Service processor card performs self test and NVRAM initialization.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E000 - E07F.
Ÿ LCD code is "OK" when complete.
2. Service processor in standby mode
Ÿ You can enter the service processor menus whenever the LCD code is "OK",
"STBY", or has an eight digit error code on the LCD display by pressing the
enter key on an ASCII terminal connected to serial port 1.
3. Built-In-Self-Test (BIST)
Ÿ The service processor initiates Built-In-Self-Test (BIST) on the Central
Electronics Complex (CEC) chips when the POWER Button is pressed.
Ÿ The VPD data is read and the CRC is checked.
Ÿ The processor compatibility test is run.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E0A0 - E0E1.
4. System Initialization
Ÿ System firmware begins to execute and initializes system registers after LCD
code E0E1.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E1XX - E2XX.
5. Memory Test
Ÿ The system firmware tests the system memory and identifies failing memory
cards and memory module locations.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E3XX.
6. Device Configuration and Test
Ÿ System firmware checks to see what devices are in the system and performs
a simple test on them.
Ÿ The system firmware displays the device name or device icon being tested.
After the keyboard name or icon appears, the user can enter the Systems
Management Services menu by hitting the "1" key (if ASCII terminal) or the
"F1" key (if Graphics terminal).
Ÿ The user can also enter one of the following:
– "5" or "F5" to start the Stand-alone Diagnostics (CD).
– "6" or "F6" to start the On-line Diagnostics (hard disk).

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-31

 7. IPL Boot Code
Ÿ The system firmware attempts to boot from the devices listed in the Boot
List.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E1XX.
8. Boot Image Execution
Ÿ Once a boot image is located on a device in the Boot List, the system
firmware code hands off control to the AIX Boot code.
– LCD Code E105 for Normal Boot or
– E15B for Service Mode Boot.
Ÿ The AIX Boot code indicates LCD progress codes in the range from 05XX to
09XX.
9. AIX Boot Complete
Ÿ The AIX login prompt appears on the main console.

3-32 Service Guide

Checkpoints

Checkpoints are intended to let users and service personal know what the server is
doing, with some detail, as it initializes. These checkpoints are not intended to be
error indicators, but in some cases a server could hang at one of the checkpoints
without displaying an 8-character error code. It is for these hang conditions, only, that
any action should be taken with respect to checkpoints. The most appropriate action
is included with each checkpoint.

Before taking actions listed with a checkpoint, it is a good idea to look for better
symptoms in the service processor error log. See Service Processor System
Information Menu.

SP Checkpoints

Service processor checkpoints are in the range E010 to E0FF. The message OK
indicates successful service processor testing and initialization. Firmware checkpoints
are listed in “Firmware Checkpoints” on page 3-36.
Note: Go to MAP 1540 for any of the following conditions:
Ÿ A four-digit code in the range of E001 through EFFF displays on the operator
panel but is not listed in the checkpoint table.
Ÿ A four-digit code displays in the checkpoint table, but does not contain a repair
action or FRU listing.
Ÿ All of the FRUs listed in the repair action have been replaced and the problem
has not been corrected.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is corrected, go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems

Table 3-4 (Page 1 of 3). Service Processor Checkpoints.

Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E000 System support controller begins See the note on 3-33.
operation. This is an informational
checkpoint.
E010 Starting service processor self-tests I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E011 Service processor self-tests completed NA
successfully
E012 Begin to set up service processor helps I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E01F Bad self-test; cannot continue
E020 Configuring CMOS I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-33

 Table 3-4 (Page 2 of 3). Service Processor Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E021 Configuring NVRAM I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E025 Service Processor accessing VPD on I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
memory card 1
E026 Service Processing accessing VPD on I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
memory card 2
E030 Beginning to build I2C resources 1. Processor card.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E031 Finished building I2C resources 1. Processor card.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E032 JTAG self-test
E040 Starting serial port tests 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Processor card.
E042 Configuring serial port 1 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Processor card.
E043 Configuring serial port 2 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Processor card.
E044 Preparing to set serial port line speed 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Processor card.
E045 Preparing to initialize serial port 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Processor card.
E05x Reserved Call for support
E060 Preparing to auto power-on (AC 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
restored) 2. Processor card.
E061 Preparing to auto power-on (Timer) 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Processor card.
E070 Configuring modem 1. Modem.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. Processor card.
E072 Preparing to call home 1. Modem.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. Processor card.
E075 Entering SP menus 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Processor card.
E076 Leaving SP menus; attempting to 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
disconnect modems 2. Processor card.
E0A0 Beginning Bring-Up Phase 1. Processor card.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E0B0 Starting processor BIST 1. Processor card.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)

3-34 Service Guide

Table 3-4 (Page 3 of 3). Service Processor Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E0C0 Starting X5 BIST 1. Processor card.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E0D0 Creating scanlog (takes a while)
E0E0 Pulling processor card out of reset 1. Processor card 1
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E0E1 Pull processor card out of reset: okay 1. Remove processor card in slot 2 (if
installed) and see if the problem is
resolved. If problem is resolved
replace processor card. If not
continue.
2. Exchange processor card in slot 1
with the processor card removed in
step 1 (or replace processor card if
only one processor card exists)
and see if problem is resolved. If
problem is resolved replace
processor card. If not continue.
3. Go to Map 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-24” on
page 2-56.
OK SP Ready Waiting for Power-On None. Normal operation.
STBY SP Ready. System was shutdown by This condition can be requested by a
the operating system and is still privileged system user with no faults.
powered on. See service processor error log for
possible operating system fault
indications.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-35

Firmware Checkpoints

Firmware uses progress codes (checkpoints) in the range of E1xx to EFFF. These
checkpoints occur during system startup and maybe be useful in diagnosing certain
problems. Service processor checkpoints are listed in “SP Checkpoints” on
page 3-33.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, go to “MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration” on page 2-31 unless otherwise indicated in the tables.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is corrected, go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems

Table 3-5 (Page 1 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.

Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E100 Reserved See the note on 3-33.
E101 Video enabled, extended memory test See the note on 3-33.
E102 Firmware restart See the note on 3-33.
E103 Set memory refresh (composite img) See the note on 3-33.
E104 Set memory refresh (recovery block) See the note on 3-33.
E105 Transfer control to Operating System See “Boot Problems/Concerns” on
(normal boot). page 3-47.
E108 Run recovery block base memory (test See the note on 3-33.
2K), set stack
E109 Copy CRC verification code to RAM See the note on 3-33.
E10A Turn on cache See the note on 3-33.
E10B Flush cache See the note on 3-33.
E10C Jump to CRC verification code in RAM See the note on 3-33.
E10D Compute composite image CRC See the note on 3-33.
E10E Jump back to ROM See the note on 3-33.
E10F Transfer control to Open Firmware See the note on 3-33.
E110 Turn off cache, Check if composite See the note on 3-33.
image CRC is valid
E111 GOOD CRC - jump to composite image See the note on 3-33.
E112 BAD CRC - initialize base memory, See the note on 3-33.
stack
E113 BAD CRC - copy uncompressed See the note on 3-33.
recovery block code to RAM
E114 BAD CRC - jump to code in RAM See the note on 3-33.
E115 BAD CRC - turn on cache See the note on 3-33.

3-36 Service Guide

Table 3-5 (Page 2 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E116 BAD CRC - copy recovery block data See the note on 3-33.
section to RAM
E117 BAD CRC - Invalidate and flush cache, See the note on 3-33.
set TOC
E118 BAD CRC - branch to high level See the note on 3-33.
recovery control routine.
E119 Initialize base memory, stack See the note on 3-33.
E11A Copy uncompressed recovery block See the note on 3-33.
code to RAM
E11B Jump to code in RAM See the note on 3-33.
E11C Turn on cache See the note on 3-33.
E11D Copy recovery block data section to See the note on 3-33.
RAM
E11E Invalidate and flush cache, set TOC See the note on 3-33.
E11F Branch to high level control routine. See the note on 3-33.
E120 Initialize I/O and early memory block See the note on 3-33.
E121 Initialize S.P. See the note on 3-33.
E122 No memory detected (system lockup) Go to “MAP 1240: Memory Problem
Note: Disk drive light is on Resolution” on page 2-15.
continuously.
E123 No memory module found in socket. See the note on 3-33.
E124 Disable defective memory bank See the note on 3-33.
E125 Clear PCI devices command reg, go See the note on 3-33.
forth
E126 Check valid image - start See the note on 3-33.
E127 Check valid image - successful See the note on 3-33.
E128 Disable interrupts, set int vectors for See the note on 3-33.
O.F.
E129 Validate target RAM address See the note on 3-33.
E12A Copy ROM to RAM, flush cache See the note on 3-33.
E12B Set MP operational parameters See the note on 3-33.
E12C Set MP CPU node characteristics See the note on 3-33.
E12D Park secondary processors in parking See the note on 3-33.
lot
E12E Primary processor sync See the note on 3-33.
E12F Unexpected return from Open Firmware See the note on 3-33.
(system lockup)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-37

 Table 3-5 (Page 3 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E130 Build device tree See the note on 3-33.
E131 Create ROOT node See the note on 3-33.
E132 Create cpus node See the note on 3-33.
E133 Create L2 Cache node See the note on 3-33.
E134 Create memory node See the note on 3-33.
E135 Create memory module node See the note on 3-33.
E136 Test memory See the note on 3-33.
E137 Create openprom node See the note on 3-33.
E138 Create options node See the note on 3-33.
E139 Create aliases node and system See the note on 3-33.
aliases
E13A Create packages node See the note on 3-33.
E140 PReP style load See the note on 3-33.
E149 Create boot mgr node See the note on 3-33.
E14C Create terminal-emulator node See the note on 3-33.
E14D Load boot image See “Boot Problems/Concerns” on
page 3-47.
E14E Create client interface node/directory See the note on 3-33.
E14F NVRAM validation, config variable See the note on 3-33.
token generation
E150 Create host (primary) PCI controller See the note on 3-33.
node
E151 Probing primary PCI bus Go to Map 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.
If a network adapter or I\O board is
replaced, see 3-1.
E152 Probe for adapter FCODE, evaluate if Go to Map 1540: Minimum
present Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.
If a network adapter or I\O board is
replaced, see 3-1.
E153 End adapter FCODE, probe/evaluation Go to Map 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.
If a network adapter or I\O board is
replaced, see 3-1.

3-38 Service Guide

Table 3-5 (Page 4 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E154 Create PCI bridge node Go to Map 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.
If a network adapter or I\O board is
replaced, see 3-1.
E155 Probe PCI bridge secondary bus Go to Map 1540: Minimum
Configuration, “Step 1540-22” on
page 2-54.
If a network adapter or I\O board is
replaced, see 3-1.
E156 Create PCI ethernet node See the note on 3-33.
E15A Create 64 bit host (primary) PCI See the note on 3-33.
controller node
E15B Transferring control to Operating See “Boot Problems/Concerns” on
System (service mode boot) page 3-47.
E15C Probe primary 64 bit PCI bus See the note on 3-33.
E15D Create host PCI controller node See the note on 3-33.
E15E Create MPIC node See the note on 3-33.
E15F Adapter VPD probe See the note on 3-33.
E160 CPU node VPD creation See the note on 3-33.
E161 Root node VPD creation See the note on 3-33.
E162 SP node VPD creation See the note on 3-33.
E164 Create PCI graphics node (P9) See the note on 3-33.
E168 Create PCI graphics node (S3) See the note on 3-33.
E16C GTX100P Subsystem Open request. See the note on 3-33.
E16D GTX100P Planar not detected or failed See the note on 3-33.
diagnostics.
E16E GTX100P Subsystem Open successful. See the note on 3-33.
E16F GTX100P Close Subsystem. See the note on 3-33.
E170 Start of PCI Bus Probe See the note on 3-33.
E171 Executing PCI-Delay function See the note on 3-33.
E174 Establish host connection Refer to “Boot Problems/Concerns” on
page 3-47 for general considerations.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-39

 Table 3-5 (Page 5 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E175 BootP request Refer to “Boot Problems/Concerns” on
page 3-47 for general considerations.
1. Turn off then on, and retry the boot
operation.
2. Verify the network connection
(network could be down).
3. Have network administrator verify
the server configuration for this
client.
E176 TFTP file transfer See the note on 3-33.
E177 Transfer failure due to TFTP error See the note on 3-33.
condition
E178 Create PCI token ring node See the note on 3-33.
E180 Service Processor Command setup See the note on 3-33.
E183 Service Processor Post See the note on 3-33.
E190 Create ISA node See the note on 3-33.
E193 Initialize Super I/O. See the note on 3-33.
E196 Probe ISA bus. See the note on 3-33.
E19B Create service processor node. See the note on 3-33.
E19C Create tablet node. See the note on 3-33.
E19D Create nvram node. See the note on 3-33.
E19E Real time clock (RTC) creation and Refer to error code 28030xxx in
initialization. “Firmware/POST Error Codes” on
page 3-2.
E19F Create eeprom node. See the note on 3-33.
E1AD See description of checkpoint E1DE.
See the note on 3-33.
E1B0 Create lpt node. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.
E1B1 Create serial node. See the note on 3-33.
E1B2 Create audio node. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.
E1B3 Create 8042 node. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.
E1B6 Probe for (ISA) keyboard. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.
E1BA Enable L2 cache. See the note on 3-33.

3-40 Service Guide

Table 3-5 (Page 6 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E1BB Set cache parms for burst. See the note on 3-33.
E1BC Set cache parms for 512KB. See the note on 3-33.
E1BD Probe for (ISA) mouse. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.
E1BE Create op-panel node. See the note on 3-33.
E1BF Create pwr-mgmt node. See the note on 3-33.
E1C0 Create ISA ethernet node. See the note on 3-33.
E1C5 Create ISA interrupt controller (pic) I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
node.
See the note on 3-33.
E1C6 Create dma node. See the note on 3-33.
E1D0 Create PCI SCSI node. See the note on 3-33.
E1D3 Create (* wildcard *) SCSI block device See the note on 3-33.
node (SD).
E1D4 Create (* wildcard *) SCSI byte device See the note on 3-33.
node (ST).
E1DB Create floppy controller (FDC) node. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-41

 Table 3-5 (Page 7 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E1DC Dynamic console selection. If a console is attached but nothing is
displayed on it, follow the steps
associated with "All display problems"
in the Entry MAP tables.
If selection screen(s) can be seen on
the terminals and the appropriate key
on the input device associated with the
desired display or terminal is pressed,
within 60 seconds, but there is no
response to the keystroke:
1. If selecting the console with a
keyboard attached to the system,
replace the keyboard. If replacing
the keyboard does not fix the
problem, replace the I/O board.
(See notes on 3-1.)
2. If selecting the console with an
ASCII terminal, suspect the ASCII
terminal. Use the Problem
Determination Procedures for the
terminal. Replace the I/O board if
these procedures do not reveal a
problem. Note: Terminal settings
should be set to:
Ÿ 9600 Baud
Ÿ No Parity
Ÿ 8 Data bits
Ÿ 1 Stop bit
E1DD Early processor exception I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.
E1DE Alternating pattern of E1DE and E1AD 1. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
is used to indicate a Default Catch
See the note on 3-33.
condition before the firmware
"checkpoint" word is available.
E1DF Create diskette drive (disk) node See the note on 3-33.
E1E0 Program flash See the note on 3-33.
E1E1 Flash update complete See the note on 3-33.
E1E2 Initialize System I/O See the note on 3-33.
E1E3 PReP boot image initialization. See the note on 3-33.
E1E4 Initialize Super I/O with default values. See the note on 3-33.
E1E5 XCOFF boot image initialization. See the note on 3-33.

3-42 Service Guide

Table 3-5 (Page 8 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E1E6 Set up early memory allocation heap. See the note on 3-33.
E1E7 PE boot image initialization. See the note on 3-33.
E1E8 Initialize primary diskette drive (polled See the note on 3-33.
mode).
E1E9 ELF boot image initialization. See the note on 3-33.
E1EA Firmware flash corrupted, load from Ensure that the diskette installed
diskette. contains recovery image appropriate for
this system unit.
The System Management Services
recovery procedure for the flash
EEPROM should be executed. See
“Firmware Update” on page 6-21.
If the diskette is installed with the
correct recovery image, then suspect:
1. Diskette
2. Diskette drive
3. Diskette cable
4. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.
E1EB Verify flash EPROM recovery image. Ensure that the diskette installed
contains recovery image appropriate for
this system unit.
The System Management Services
recovery procedure for the flash
EEPROM should be executed. See
“Firmware Update” on page 6-21.
If the diskette is installed with the
correct recovery image, then suspect:
1. Diskette
2. Diskette drive
3. Diskette cable
4. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-33.
E1EC Get recovery image entry point See the note on 3-33.
E1ED Invalidate instruction cache See the note on 3-33.
E1EE Jump to composite image See the note on 3-33.
E1EF Erase flash See the note on 3-33.
E1F0 Start O.B.E. See the note on 3-33.
E1F1 Begin self-test sequence on boot See the note on 3-33.
device(s)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-43

 Table 3-5 (Page 9 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E1F2 Power-On Password prompt. Prompt should be visible on the system
console.
If a console is attached but nothing is
displayed on it, go to the “Quick Entry
MAP” on page 2-2 with the symptom
"All display problems."
E1F3 Privileged-Access Password prompt. Prompt should be visible on the system
console.
If a console is attached but nothing is
displayed on it, go to the “Quick Entry
MAP” on page 2-2 with the symptom
"All display problems."
E1F5 Build boot device list. See the note on 3-33.
E1F6 Determine boot device sequence. See the note on 3-33.
E1F7 No boot image located. See the note on 3-33.
E1FB Scan SCSI bus for attached devices. See the note on 3-33.
E1FD Default Catch The operator panel will alternate
between the code E1FD and another
Exxx code, where Exxx is the point at
which the error occurred. If the Exxx is
not listed in this table, go to “MAP
1540: Minimum Configuration” on
page 2-31.
E201 Setup PHB BARC addresses. Replace the I/O board (See notes on
3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E202 Initialize PHB registers and PHB's PCI Replace the I/O board (See notes on
configuration registers. 3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E203 Look for PCI to ISA bridge. Replace the I/O board (See notes on
3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E204 Setup ISA bridge. PCI config. registers Replace the I/O board (See notes on
and initialize 3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E206 Check for 50MHz device on PCI Bus in 1. Replace the I/O board (See notes
Slots 1P or 2P. on 3-1.)
2. I/O Adapters in PCI slots 1P or 2P.
3. See the note on 3-33.
E207 Setup Data gather mode and 64/32-bit Replace the I/O board (See notes on
mode on PCG. 3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E208 Assign bus number on PCG. Replace the I/O board (See notes on
3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E209 Assign PCI I/O addresses on PCI. Replace the I/O board (See notes on
3-1.) See the note on 3-33.

3-44 Service Guide

Table 3-5 (Page 10 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E20A Assign PCI I/O addresses on PCG Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E20B Check MCERs stuck at fault. 1. Replace the system board. See
the note on 3-33.
2. If the problem persists, go to “MAP
1540: Minimum Configuration” on
page 2-31.
E20C Testing L2 cache. Replace the processor card (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E211 IPL ROS CRC checking. Replace the I/O board (See notes on
3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E212 Processor POST. Replace the processor card (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E213 Initial memory configuration. Go to “MAP 1240: Memory Problem
Resolution” on page 2-15.
E214, E218 Memory test. Go to “MAP 1240: Memory Problem
Resolution” on page 2-15.
E216 Copy ROS into RAM. Setup Translation Replace the memory card (See notes
and C environment. on 3-1.) See the note on 3-33.
E220 Final memory configuration. Go to “MAP 1240: Memory Problem
Resolution” on page 2-15.
E297 Start firmware softload path execution. See the note on 3-33.
E298 Start firmware recovery path execution. See the note on 3-33.
E299 Start C code execution. See the note on 3-33.
E3xx Memory test See “MAP 1240: Memory Problem
Resolution” on page 2-15.
E440 Validate NVRAM, initialize partitions as 1. Verify that the system and service
needed. processor firmware levels are at
the current release levels, update
as necessary.
2. Replace the memory card (See
notes on 3-1.) See the note on
3-33.
E441 Generate /options node NVRAM 1. Verify that the system and service
configuration variable properties. processor firmware levels are at
the current release levels, update
as necessary.
2. Replace the memory card (See
notes on 3-1.) See the note on
3-33.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-45

 Table 3-5 (Page 11 of 11). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E442 Validate NVRAM partitions. 1. Verify that the system and service
processor firmware levels are at
the current release levels, update
as necessary.
2. Replace the memory card (See
notes on 3-1.) See the note on
3-33.
E443 Generate NVRAM configuration Suspect a system firmware problem if
variable dictionary words. this problem persists. Verify that the
system firmware is at the current
release level, update as necessary.
See the note on 3-33.

3-46 Service Guide

Boot Problems/Concerns

Depending on the boot device, a checkpoint may be displayed on the operator panel
for an extended period of time while the boot image is retrieved from the device. This
is particularly true tape and network boot attempts. If booting from CDROM or tape,
watch for activity on the drive's LED indicator. A blinking LED means that the loading
of either the boot image or additional information required by the operating system
being booted is still in progess. If the checkpoint is displayed for an extended period
of time and the drive LED is not indicating any activity there may be a problem
loading the boot image from the device.
Note: For network boot attempts, if the system is not connected to an active
network or if the target server is inaccessible (this can also result from incorrect IP
parameters being supplied), the system will still attempt to boot and because
time-out durations are necessarily long to accommodate retries, the system may
appear to be hung.

This procedure assumes that a CD-ROM drive is installed and a Diagnostics

CD-ROM is available.
1. Restart the system and get to the Firmware SMS Main Menu. Select Multiboot.
Ÿ Check if the intended boot device is correctly specified in the boot sequence.
Ÿ If the intended boot device is not correctly identified in the boot sequence,
add it to the boot sequence using the SMS menus (if the intended boot
device cannot be added to the boot sequencego to step 3).
Ÿ If attempting to boot from the network go to step 2.
Ÿ If attempting to boot from a disk drive or CD-ROM go to step 3.
2. If attempting to boot from the network:
Ÿ Verify that IP parameters are correct.
Ÿ Attempt to "Ping" the target server using the SMS "Ping" utility. If the ping is
successful, have network administrator verify the server configuration for this
client.
Ÿ Turn power Off, then On and retry the boot operation.
Ÿ Check network cabling to adapter.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-47

 3. Try to boot and run standalone diagnostics against the system, particularly
against the intended boot device.
Ÿ If the intended boot device is not listed in the "NEW RESOURCE" list go to
"MAP 0290: Missing Resource Problem Resolution" in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
Ÿ If a SRN, not an 8-digit error code, is reported, go to the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems manual.
Ÿ If the diagnostics are successful, it may be necessary to perform an
operating system specific recovery process, or reinstall the operating system.
Ÿ If unable to load standalone diagnostics:
a. Verify proper SCSI bus termination
b. Check SCSI cabling
c. It is possible that another attached SCSI device is causing the problem.
Ÿ Disconnect the signal and power cables from the disk drive cage
backplane.
Ÿ Disconnect the disk drive(s) in the disk drive cage from the backplane.
Ÿ Disconnect the signal and power cables from any other SCSI devices
attached to the SCSI adapter that the CD-ROM drive is attached to.
Ÿ Try to boot the standalone diagnostics again.
Ÿ If unable to load standalone diagnostics go to step 4.
Ÿ If standalone diagnostics load, one of the disconnected devices removed
is causing the problem, reconnect the devices one at a time and retry the
boot operation until the problem recurs and replace the device that
caused the problem (if the problem appears to be one of the disk drives
in the disk drive cage be aware it could be either the disk drive or the
backplane). Go to "MAP 0410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
4. It is possible that another installed adapter is causing the problem.
Ÿ Remove all installed adapters except the one the CD-ROM drive is attached
to and the one used for the console.
Ÿ Try to boot the standalone diagnostics again.
Ÿ If unable to load standalone diagnostics go to step 5.
Ÿ If standalone diagnostics load, re-install adapters (and attached devices as
applicable) one at atime and retry the boot operation until the problem
recurs. Then replace the adapter or device that caused the problem (I/O
board can also cause the device or adapter to fail). Go to "MAP 0410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems.

3-48 Service Guide

5. Either the CD-ROM drive, SCSI adapter, the graphics adapter, or the I/O board
is most likely defective. A tty terminal attached to the serial port also can be used
to also can be used to determine if the graphics adapters is causing the problem.
This is done by removing the graphics adapter, attaching a tty to the serial, and
retrying standalone diagnostics. If the standalone diagnostics load, the graphic
adapter should be replaced.
Ÿ If the CD-ROM drive is attached to a SCSI adapter card rather than the
integrated SCSI adapter on the I/O board.
– Replace SCSI adapter.
Ÿ Replace I/O board.
Ÿ If you replaced the indicated FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, or
the above descriptions did not address your particular situation, go to“MAP
1540: Minimum Configuration” on page 2-31.
Ÿ Go to "MAP 0410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-49

3-50 Service Guide
Chapter 4. Location Codes

This system unit uses physical location codes in conjunction with AIX location codes
to provide mapping of the failing field replaceable units. The location codes are
produced by the system unit's firmware and AIX.

Physical Location Codes

Physical location codes provide a mapping of logical functions in a platform (or
expansion sites for logical functions, such as connectors or ports) to their specific
locations within the physical structure of the platform.

Location Code Format

The format for the location code is an alphanumeric string of variable length,
consisting of a series of location identifiers, separated by the standard dash (-) or
slash (/) character. The series is hierarchical; that is, each location identifier in the
string is a physical child of the one preceding it.
Ÿ The - (dash) separator character represents a normal structural relationship
where the child is a separate physical package and it plugs into (or is connected
to) the parent. For example, P1-C1 is a CPU card (C1) plugged into a planar
(P1), or P1-M1 is a memory card (M1) plugged into a planar (P1).
Ÿ The / (slash) separator character separates the base location code of a function
from any extended location information. A group of logical devices can have the
same base location code because they are all on the same physical package,
but may require extended location information to describe the connectors they
support. For example, P2/S1 describes the location of the serial port 1 controller
and its connector (S1), which is located on planar P2 (its base location code),
but the / indicates that further devices can be connected to it at the external S1
serial connector. The keyboard controller and its connector likewise have
location code P2/K1, which means they have the same base location code (P2)
as serial port 1, but a different external connector. In contrast, the location code
P2-K1 actually points to the device connected to connector K1; that is, the
keyboard. The location code P2/Z1 indicates an integrated SCSI controller which
drives connector Z1, while location codes of P2-Z1-... point to the actual SCSI
bus and devices.

Each location identifier consists of one alpha prefix character that identifies a location
type, and a decimal integer number (typically one or two digits) that identifies a
specific instance of this location type. Certain location types may also support
secondary sub-locations, which are indicated by appending a period (".") character
and a sub-location instance number.

Chapter 4. Location Codes 4-1

Specifically, the format of a location code is defined as follows:

pn[.n][- or /]pn[.n][- or /]...

Where p is a defined alpha location type prefix, n is a location instance number, and
[.n] is a sub-location instance number (where applicable). Sub-location notation is
used only for location types which have clearly defined and limited expansion sites;
for example, memory module slots on a memory card. Primarily, the [.n] sub-location
notation is intended for use as an abbreviation of the location code in cases where:
1. Based on the device structure, the abbreviated sub-location code conveys the
same information in a more concise form than an additional level of location
identifier - for example:
Ÿ P1-M1.4 (pluggable module 4 on Memory Card 1 on Planar 1), rather than
P1-M1-M4
Ÿ P1-C1.1 (pluggable CPU 1 on CPU Card 1 on Planar 1), rather than
P1-C1-C1
Ÿ P2-Z1-A3.1 (LUN 1 at SCSI ID 3 on integrated SCSI bus 1 from Planar 2),
rather than P2-Z1-A3-A1
2. The sub-location is either a basic physical extension or sub-enclosure of the
base location, but does not represent additional function or connectivity; for
example, a drawer in a rack (U1.2) or a riser card on an I/O board (P2.1).

4-2 Service Guide

AIX Location Codes

The basic formats of the AIX location codes are:

Ÿ For non-SCSI devices/drives
AB-CD-EF-GH
Ÿ For SCSI devices/drives
AB-CD-EF-G,H

For planars, cards, and non-SCSI devices the location code is defined as:
AB-CD-EF-GH
| | | |
| | | Device/FRU/Port ID
| | Connector ID
| devfunc Number, Adapter Number or Physical Location
Bus Type or PCI Parent Bus

Ÿ The AB value identifies a bus type or PCI parent bus as assigned by the
firmware.
Ÿ The CD value identifies adapter number, adapter's devfunc number, or physical
location. The devfunc number is defined as the PCI device number times 8, plus
the function number.
Ÿ The EF value identifies a connector.
Ÿ The GH value identifies a port, address, device, or FRU.
Adapters and cards are identified with just AB-CD.

The possible values for AB are:

00 Processor bus
01 ISA bus
02 EISA bus
03 MCA bus
04 PCI bus used in the case where the PCI bus cannot be identified
05 PCMCIA buses
xy For PCI adapters where x is equal to or greater than 1. The x and y are characters in the
range of 0-9, A-H, J-N, P-Z (O, I, and lower case are omitted) and are equal to the parent
bus's ibm, aix-loc Open Firmware Property.

The possible values for CD depend on the adapter/card.

For pluggable PCI adapters/cards, CD is the device's devfunc number (PCI device
number times 8, plus the function number). The C and D are characters in the range

Chapter 4. Location Codes 4-3

of 0-9, and A-F (hex numbers). This allows the location code to uniquely identify
multiple adapters on individual PCI cards.

For pluggable ISA adapters, CD is equal to the order the ISA cards
defined/configured either by SMIT or the ISA Adapter Configuration Service Aid.

For integrated ISA adapters, CD is equal to a unique code identifying the ISA
adapter. In most cases this is equal to the adapter's physical location code. In cases
where a physical location code is not available, CD will be FF.

EF is the connector ID. It is used to identify the adapter's connector that a resource
is attached to.

GH is used to identify a port, device, or FRU. For example:

Ÿ For async devices GH defines the port on the fanout box. The values are 00 to
15.
Ÿ For a diskette drive H defines which diskette drive 1 or 2. G is always 0.
Ÿ For all other devices GH is equal to 00.

For integrated adapter, EF-GH is the same as the definition for a pluggable adapter.
For example, the location code for a diskette drive is 01-D1-00-00. A second
diskette drive is 01-D1-00-01.

For SCSI the location code is defined as:

AB-CD-EF-G,H
| | | | |
| | | | Logical Unit address of the SCSI Device
| | | Control Unit Address of the SCSI Device
| | Connector ID
| devfunc Number, Adapter Number or Physical Location
Bus Type or PCI Parent Bus

Where AB-CD-EF are the same as non-SCSI devices.

G defines the control unit address of the device. Values of 0 to 15 are valid.

H defines the logical unit address of the device. Values of 0 to 255 are valid.

There is also a bus location code that is generated as '00-XXXXXXXX' where

XXXXXXXX is equivalent to the node's unit address.

Examples of physical location codes displayed by AIX are:

4-4 Service Guide

 Processor Card in slot 1 of planar 1

P1-C1

Memory module in system planar slot 2

P1-M2

Memory module 12 in card in slot 2 of system planar

U1-P1-M2.12

Examples of AIX location codes displayed are:

Integrated PCI adapter

10-80 Ethernet
10-60 Integrated SCSI Port 1
10-88 Integrated SCSI Port 2

Pluggable PCI adapters

20-58 to 20-5F Any PCI card in slot 1

20-60 to 20-67 Any PCI card in slot 2
10-68 to 10-6F Any PCI card in slot 3
10-70 to 10-77 Any PCI card in slot 4
10-78 to 10-7F Any PCI card in slot 5

Integrated ISA adapters

01-D1 Diskette adapter

01-R1 Parallel port adapter
01-S1 Serial port 1 adapter
01-S2 Serial port 2 adapter
01-S3 Serial port 3 adapter
01-K1 Keyboard adapter

Device attached to SCSI controller

10-60-00-4,0 Device attached to Integrated SCSI

Port 1

Chapter 4. Location Codes 4-5

AIX and Physical Location Code Reference Table

AIX Physical
Location Location
Codes Codes

10-80 P2/E1
AUI Ethernet
01-S1 P2/S1
01-S2 P2/S2 Serial

01-K1-01 P2/O1 Mouse

01-K1-00 P2/K1 Keyboard

01-Q1-00
- P2/Q1 Tablet

10-80 P2/E1 RJ45 Ethernet

01-R1 P2/R1 Parallel

P2/F1 CEC Fan

10-88 P2/Z2 Ext SCSI

P2-I5 PCI 32-Bit

10-78 to 10-7F
P2-I4 PCI 32-Bit
10-70 to 10-77
PCI 32-Bit
10-68 to 10-6F P2-I3
P2-I2 PCI 64-Bit
20-60 to 20-67

P2-I1 PCI 64-Bit

20-58 to 20-5F

4-6 Service Guide

 Physical AIX
Location Location
Codes Codes

Internal SCSI
P2/Z1 10-60

Diskette Drive
P2/D1 01-D1

Processor Card
(primary) P1-C1

Processor Card
P1-C2

Memory Card
P1-M1
Memory Card
P1-M2

Operator Panel P2/L1

I/O Fan
P2/F2

Chapter 4. Location Codes 4-7

 AIX Physical Physical Logical
FRU Name Location Code Location Code Connection Identification

Central Electronics Complex (CEC)

System board 00-00 P1

Processor card 00-00 P1-C1 Processor CPU ID 0x00
1 connectors and 0x01 (if
J8 2-way card)
Processor card 00-02 P1-C2 Processor CPU ID 0x04
2 connector and 0x05 (if
J6 2-way card)
Memory card 1 00-00 P1-M1 Memory card
connector J3
Memory Card 1 00-00 P1-M1.1 Memory card Extents:
modules 1 thru through sockets 8L,8H,10L,10H,
16 P1-M1.16 J1,J2,J3,J4, 12L,12H,14L,14H
J5,J6,J7,J8 9L,9H,11L,11H,
J9,J10,J11,J12, 13L,13H,15L,15H
J13,J14,J15,J16
Memory card 2 00-00 P1-M2 Memory card
connector J2
Memory card 2 00-00 P1-M2.1 Memory card Extents:
modules 1 thru through sockets 8L,8H,10L,10H,
16 P1-M2.16 J1,J2,J3,J4, 12L,12H,14L,14H
J5,J6,J7,J8 9L,9H,11L,11H,
J9,J10,J11,J12, 13L,13H,15L,15H
J13,J14,J15,J16
I/O board 00-00 P2

Integrated Devices

Diskette Drive 01-D1-00-00 P2-D1 I/O board Base Address

Connector J13 0x0310
Keyboard 01-K1-00-00 P2-K1 I/O board Base Address
connector J24 0x0060
Mouse 01-K1-01-00 P2-O1 I/O board 0x0060
connector J24
Diskette Port 01-D1 P2/D1 I/O board 0x03f0
connector J17
Keyboard Port 01-K1-00 P2/K1 I/O board 0x0060
connector J24
Mouse Port 01-K1-01 P2/O1 I/O board 0x0060
connector J24
Tablet Port 01-Q1-01-00 P2-Q1 I/O board 0x0060
connector J18

4-8 Service Guide

 AIX Physical Physical Logical
FRU Name Location Code Location Code Connection Identification
Serial Port 1 01-S1 P2/S1 I/O board 0x0318
connector J23
Serial Port 2 01-S2 P2/S2 I/O board 0x0218
connector J23
Parallel Port 01-R1 P2/R1 I/O board 0x0378
connector J27
AUI Ethernet 10-80 P2/E1 I/O board Host Bridge
Port connector J20 ID00, Device 06
RJ45 Ethernet 10-80 P2/E1 I/O board Host Bridge
Port connector J25 ID00, Device 06
Internal SCSI 10-60 P2/Z1 I/O board Host Bridge
Port connector J7 ID00, Device 02
External SCSI 10-88 P2/Z2 I/O board Host Bridge
Port connector J28 ID00, Device 07

Pluggable Adapters

Card in PCI Slot 20-58 to 20-5F P2-I1 I/O board Host Bridge
1P connector J9 ID01, Device 01
Card in PCI Slot 20-60 to 20-67 P2-I2 I/O board Host Bridge
2P connector J8 ID01, Device 02
Card in PCI Slot 10-68 to 10-6F P2-I3 I/O board Host Bridge
3P connector J14 ID00, Device 03
Card in PCI Slot 10-70 to 10-77 P2-I4 I/O board Host Bridge
4P connector J13 ID00, Device 04
Card in PCI Slot 10-78 to 10-7F P2-I5 I/O board Host Bridge
5P connector J12 ID00, Device 05

SCSI Devices

Base CD-ROM 10-60-00-1, 0 P2-Z1-A1 Primary SCSI

(Bay D1) Bus ID 1 (refer
to the note at
the end of this
table)
Media Device in 10-60-00-0, 0 P2-Z1-A0 Primary SCSI
Bay D2 Bus ID 0 (refer
to the note at
the end of this
table)
DASD in Bay 10-60-00-9, 0 P2-Z1-A9 Primary SCSI
D4 Bus ID 9
DASD in Bay 10-60-00-8, 0 P2-Z1-A8 Secondary SCSI
D5 Bus ID 8

Chapter 4. Location Codes 4-9

 AIX Physical Physical Logical
FRU Name Location Code Location Code Connection Identification

Fans

I/O fan F2 Fan connector

J3 at system
board
CEC fan F1 Fan connector
J21 at system
board
I/O fan P2/F2 Fan connector
connector J3 at system
board
CEC fan P2/F1 Fan connector
connector J21 at system
board

Operator Panel

Operator panel L1 I/O board

connector J1
Operator panel P2/L1 I/O board
Connector connector J1

Power Supply

Power supply V1 I2C Ad 92, Ch2;

RTAS=9002-0

Battery

Battery V2 I/O board

connector J11
Note: The SCSI bus ID's are the recommended values. Features installed at the manufacturing site
will correspond to these IDs. Field installations may not comply with these recommendations.

4-10 Service Guide

Chapter 5. Loading the System Diagnostics

The system diagnostics can be booted either from the default boot list or from the
service mode boot list. (The service mode boot list can be modified using the
system diagnostics "Display or Change Bootlist" service aid. The service mode boot
list cannot be modified under the System Management Services.)

To load Standalone Diagnostics from the default boot list, perform the following
procedure:
1. Verify with the system administrator and users that all programs may be stopped,
then do so.
2. Turn off the system.
3. Wait 30 seconds, and turn on the system.
4. Immediately insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
5. When or after the keyboard indicator appears during startup, press the F5 key on
a directly-attached keyboard (or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal).
6. Enter any requested passwords.

Online Diagnostics can be loaded by booting from the service mode boot list by
pressing the F6 key (on a directly-attached keyboard) or the number 6 key on an
ASCII terminal.

The procedure for booting from the devices listed in the service mode boot list
(Online Diagnostics) is the following:
1. Verify with the system administrator and users that all programs may be stopped,
then do so.
2. Turn off the system.
3. Wait 30 seconds, and turn on the system.
4. When or after the keyboard indicator appears during startup, press the F6 key on
a directly-attached keyboard (or the number 6 key on an ASCII terminal).
5. Enter any requested passwords.

After any requested passwords have been entered, the system attempts to boot from
the first device of each type found on the list. If no bootable image is found on the
first device of each type on the list, the system does not search through the other
devices of that type for a bootable image; instead, it polls the first device of the next
type.

Chapter 5. Loading Diagnostics 5-1

If all types of devices in the boot list have been polled without finding a bootable
image, the system restarts, this gives the user the opportunity to start the System
Management Services ( by pressing the F1 key on a directly attached keyboard or
the number 1 on an ASCII terminal) before the system attempts to boot again.

Default Boot List and Service Mode Boot List

The default boot list is:

1. Diskette drive
2. CD-ROM drive
3. Tapedrive
4. Disk drive
5. Network device
Ÿ Token-Ring
Ÿ Ethernet

Pressing the F5 key on a directly-attached keyboard (or the number 5 key on an

ASCII terminal) causes the system to load Standalone Diagnostics given that a
Diagnostic CD is present in the CD-ROM drive.

Pressing the F6 key on a directly-attached keyboard (or number 6 key on an ASCII

terminal) loads Online Diagnostics from the service mode boot list, no Diagnostic
CD should be in the CD-ROM drive since Online Diagnostics is typically run from a
hard disk, which is in the service mode boot list defined using the system diagnostics
"Display or Change Bootlist" service aid. Like the default boot list, the service mode
boot list can contain five entries. The F6 or 6 keys work like the F5 or 5 keys, with
the following exceptions:
Ÿ The system searchs for a boot record according to the service mode boot list.
Ÿ If the service mode boot list is discovered by a cyclical redundancy check to be
corrupted, the system rebuilds the service mode boot list according to the default
boot list. (The default boot list contains five entries, and for each matching
device type found in the system unit, the system makes an entry in the service
mode boot list.)
Ÿ If no service mode boot list is present, the system uses the default boot list.

5-2 Service Guide

Chapter 6. System Management Services

The System Management Services make it possible for you to view information
about your computer and to perform such tasks as setting passwords and changing
device configurations.

If you have chosen a graphical display as your system console, you can use the
graphical System Management Services described below. If you are using an ASCII
display as your system console, see “Text-Based System Management Services” on
page 6-23.

Graphical System Management Services

To start the Open Firmware command line or graphical System Management

Services, turn on or restart the computer.

The firmware version installed in your system unit is displayed at the bottom
right-hand corner of the initial logo screen. Please note the version number;
processor upgrades may require a specified version of firmware to be installed in
your system unit. (Update System Firmware is an option under the Utilities menu in
the System Management Services.)

After the logo is displayed, initialization icons appear across the bottom of the
screen.

To enter the Open Firmware command line, you must press the F8 key after the
keyboard icon appears during startup.

If you have pressed the F8 key, the Open Firmware command line (an "OK" prompt)
appears after the initialization and power-on self test (POST) are complete.
Note: If you have installed a privileged-access password, you are prompted for this
password before gaining access to the Open Firmware command line.

The Open Firmware command line can be used to set up adapters that are not
configurable with the System Management Services. Your adapter documentation
directs you to use this option if it is needed.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-1

To enter the graphical System Management Services instead of the Open Firmware
command line, you must press the F1 key after the keyboard icon appears during
startup.

If you have pressed the F1 key, the System Management Services appears after the
initialization and power-on self test (POST) are complete.
Note: If you have installed a privileged-access password, you are prompted for this
password before gaining access to the System Management Services menu.

After the System Management Services starts, the following screen appears.

You may also press F8 here to enter the OK> prompt.

6-2 Service Guide

The System Management Services screen contains the following choices.

Config: Enables you to view your system setup.

Multi-Boot: Enables you to set and view the default operating

system, modify the boot sequence, access the Open Firmware
command prompt, and other options.

Utilities: Enables you to set and remove passwords, control

the playing of system tones, enable the unattended start mode,
set and view the addresses of your system's SCSI controllers,
select the active console, view or clear the firmware error log,
and update your system unit's firmware program.

Exit: Returns you to the previous screen.

To select an icon, move the cursor with the arrow keys to choose which icon is
highlighted, then press the Enter key. You can also select an icon by clicking on it
with your left mouse button. To leave the current screen, either press the Esc key or
select the Exit icon.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-3

Config

Selecting this icon makes it possible for you to view information about the setup of
your system unit. A list similar to the following appears when you select the Config
icon.

If more than one screen of information is available, a blue arrow in the top right
corner of the screen appears. Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll
through the pages.

6-4 Service Guide

MultiBoot

The options available from this screen allow you to view and set various options
regarding the operating system and boot sequence.

The following describes the choices available on this screen.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-5

 Select Software: The Select Software option, if supported by
the operating system, allows you to choose which operating
system to use. This option is supported by AIX. Not all
operating systems support this option.
If you receive an informational message saying that no
operating system is installed, then the system information in
non-volatile storage may have been lost. This can happen if
the battery has been removed. To correct this situation, refer
to the bootlist reference in your AIX operating system
documentation.

Software Default: This option, if supported by the operating

system, enables you to select an operating system as the
default operating system for your system unit.

Install From: Enables you to select a media drive from which

to install an operating system.

6-6 Service Guide

Boot Sequence: Enables you to view and change the custom
boot list (the sequence in which devices are searched for
operating system code). You may choose from 1 to 5 devices
for the custom boot list.
The default boot sequence is:
Note:
1. The primary diskette drive.
2. The CD-ROM drive.
3. Tape drive.
4. Hard disk drive.
5. Network device.
To change the custom boot list, enter a new order in the New
column, then click on the Save icon. The list of boot devices is
updated to reflect the new order.
Attention:
To change the custom boot list back to the default values, click
on Default. If you change your startup sequence, you must be
extremely careful when performing write operations (for
example, copying, saving, or formatting). You can accidentally
overwrite data or programs if you select the wrong drive.

OK Prompt: Enables you to go directly to the Open Firmware

command prompt. The Open Firmware command prompt is
used for debugging and device driver development. For more
information about the operation of the Open Firmware
command prompt, refer to IEEE Standard 1275.

Multiboot Start: Clicking on this button toggles whether the

Multiboot menu will appear automatically at startup.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-7

Utilities

Selecting this icon enables you to perform various tasks and view additional
information about your system unit.

Password Spin-Up Error Log RIPL SCSI id Update Console

Exit

The following describes the choices available on this screen.

Password: Enables you to set password protection for turning

on the system unit and for using system administration tools.

Hard Disk Spin Up Delay: Enables you to change the spin up

delay for SCSI hard disk drives attached to your system.

Error Log: Enables you to view and clear the firmware error
log information for your system unit.

6-8 Service Guide

RIPL (Remote Initial Program Load): Enables you to select a
remote system from which to load programs via a network
adapter when your system unit is first turned on. This option
also allows you to configure network adapters which require
setup.
SCSI ID: Allows you to view and change the addresses (IDs) of
the SCSI controllers attached to your system unit.

Update: Allows you to update the system firmware program.

Console: If you have more than one keyboard and display

attached to your system unit, or if you have an ASCII terminal
attached to your system unit in addition to a keyboard and
display, this tool allows you to define which one is active.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-9

Password

When you select this icon, the following screen is displayed.

Power On

Set Remove Remote <Off>

Privileged

Set Remove

Exit

Power-On Password

Setting a power-on password helps protect information stored in your system unit. If
a power-on password is set for your system unit, the Power-On status icon is shown
in the locked position; if a power-on password is not set, then the Power-On status
icon is shown in the unlocked position (as in the screen above).

When you select the Set icon, a screen with 8 empty boxes appears. Type your
password in these boxes. You can use any combination of up to eight characters
(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. As you type a character, a key appears in
the box.

6-10 Service Guide

Press Enter when you are finished; you must type the password again for
verification.

If you make a mistake, press the Esc key and start again.

After you have entered and verified the password, the power-on password status
icon flashes and changes to the locked position to indicate that the power-on
password is installed.

If you previously had set a power-on password and want to remove it, select the
Remove icon.

Note: The system unit power cable must be disconnected before removing the
battery.

A password becomes effective only after the system is turned off and back on again.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-11

Remote Mode: The remote mode, when enabled, allows the system to start from
the defined boot device. This mode is ideal for network servers and other system
units that operate unattended. When the remote mode is set, the icon changes to
Remote <On>.
Note: In order to use the remote mode feature for booting unattended devices, you
must enable the unattended start mode. See the “SYSTEM POWER
CONTROL MENU” on page A-12 for instructions on enabling the unattended
start mode, which allows the system unit to turn on whenever AC power is
applied to the system (instead of having the system unit wait for the power
button to be pushed).

Privileged-Access Password

The privileged-access password protects against the unauthorized starting of the

system programs. Select the Set icon to set and verify the privileged-access
password.

When you select the Set icon, a screen with 8 empty boxes appears. Type your
password in these boxes. You can use any combination of up to eight characters
(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. As you type a character, a key appears in
the box.

Press Enter when you are finished; you must type the password again for
verification.
6-12 Service Guide
If you make a mistake, press the Esc key and start again.

After you have entered and verified the password, the privileged-access password
icon flashes and changes to the locked position to indicate that your system unit now
requires the password you just entered before running system programs.
Attention: If no user-defined boot-list exists, and the privileged-access password
has been enabled, you are asked for the privileged-access password at
startup every time you boot up your system.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-13

Hard Disk Spin Up Delay

This selection allows you to change the spin up delay for SCSI hard disk drives
attached to your system. Spin up delay values can be entered manually or a default
setting can be used. All values are measured in seconds. The default is two
seconds. After you have entered the new Spin up delay values, use the arrow keys
to highlight the Save icon and press the Enter key.

6-14 Service Guide

Error Log

Selecting this icon displays the log of errors your system unit has encountered during
operations.

Selecting the Clear icon erases the entries in this log.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-15

RIPL

Selecting the Remote Initial Program Load (RIPL) icon above gives you access to
the following selections.

6-16 Service Guide

Set Address

The Set Address icon allows you to define addresses from which your system unit
can receive RIPL code.

Remote IPL Setup

Client Addr 000.000.000.000

Server Addr 000.000.000.000
Gateway Addr 000.000.000.000
Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000

Save Exit

If any of the addresses is incomplete or contains a number other than 0 to 255, an

error message is displayed when you select the Save icon. To clear this error,
change the improper address and select Save again.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-17

Ping

The Ping icon allows you to confirm that a specified address is valid by sending a
test transmission to that address.

After choosing the Ping option, you are asked to indicate which communications
adapter (Token Ring or Ethernet) should be used to send the test transmission.

Config

The Config icon allows you to configure network adapters which require setup.
1. Selecting the Config icon causes a list of the adapters requiring configuration to
appear.
a. Use the arrow keys or mouse to highlight an adapter to configure.
b. Press the spacebar to select the adapter.
c. Highlight the OK icon and press the Enter key.

6-18 Service Guide

2. The next screen allows you to select the type of adapter you have just chosen
(or allow the system to select the type automatically).
a. Use the arrow keys or mouse to highlight an adapter to configure.
b. Press the spacebar to select the adapter.
c. Highlight the OK icon and press the Enter key.
After choosing the adapter to configure, you can select the communications
mode of the chosen adapter (or allow the system to select the communications
mode automatically).
a. Use the arrow keys or mouse to highlight an adapter to configure.
b. Press the spacebar to select the adapter.
c. Highlight the OK icon and press the Enter key.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-19

SCSI ID

This selection allows you to view and change the addresses (IDs) of the SCSI
controllers attached to your system unit. To change a SCSI controllers ID, highlight
the entry by moving the arrow keys, then use the space bar to scroll through
available IDs. After you have entered the new address, use the arrow keys or
mouse to highlight the Save icon and press the Enter key.

At any time in this process, you can select the Default icon to change the SCSI IDs
to the default value of 7.

6-20 Service Guide

Firmware Update

This selection allows you to update the system or service processor firmware in your
system unit from an image on a 3.5 inch diskette.

In order to create a firmware diskette with the latest level of firmware available, see
http://www.rs6ððð.ibm.com/support/micro

When prompted, insert the firmware update diskette containing the new firmware
image.

ATTENTION: While the new firmware image is being copied into your system unit,
you must not turn off the system unit. Turning off the system unit during the update
process may render your system unit inoperable.

After the firmware update is complete, shut down and restart the system unit.

If the firmware update does not complete successfully or the system unit does not
restart after the firmware update, contact your authorized reseller or marketing
representative.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-21

Firmware Recovery

If a troubleshooting procedure has indicated that the firmware information in your

system unit has been damaged, then you must perform a firmware recovery.

To perform a firmware recovery, do the following:

1. Locate your firmware update diskette.
2. Using another system unit, rename the *.img file on the firmware update diskette
to precover.img
3. Make sure your system unit is turned off.
4. Insert the firmware recovery diskette into your system unit.
5. Turn on your system unit.
6. When the keyboard indicator appears, press the 1 key if the system console is
an ASCII terminal, or the F1 key if the system console is a directly-attached
keyboard.
7. When the System Management Services appear, choose Utilities and perform a
Firmware Update as described above.

6-22 Service Guide

Text-Based System Management Services

The text-based Open Firmware command line and System Management Services are
available if an ASCII terminal is attached to your system unit. The text-based Open
Firmware command line allows you to configure some adapters, and the System
Management Services makes it possible for you to view information about your
system unit and to perform such tasks as setting passwords and changing device
configurations.

To enter the Open Firmware command line, you must press the number 8 key after
the keyboard text symbol appears during startup.

If you have pressed the number 8 key, the Open Firmware command line (an "OK"
prompt) appears after the initialization and power-on self tests (POST) are complete.

The Open Firmware command line can be used to set up adapters that are not
configurable with the System Management Services. Your adapter documentation
directs you to use this option if it is needed.

To start the text-based System Management Services instead of the Open Firmware
command line, press the number 1 key on the ASCII terminal keyboard when the
keyboard text symbol appears during startup.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-23

After the text-based System Management Services starts, the following screen
appears.
Note: The version of firmware currently installed in your system unit is displayed at
the top of each screen in the text-based System Management Services.
Please note the version number; processor upgrades may require a specified
version of firmware to be installed in your system unit. Update System
Firmware is an option under the Utilities menu.

à ð
System Management Services

1 Display Configuration
2 Multiboot
3 Utilities
4 Select Language

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

====>

á ñ

Selecting the numbered options provide capabilities described on the following

pages.

After you have finished using the text-based System Management Services, entering
x (for exit) boots your system unit.

6-24 Service Guide

Display Configuration

This option provides information about the setup of your computer. A screen similar
to the following is displayed.

à ð
<Device Name>

PowerPC, POWER3
L2-Cache, 1M/4M
Memory
Memory card slot=1, module slot=1 size=32MB
Memory card slot=1, module slot=2 size=32MB
LPT
addr=3BC
COM
addr=3F8
COM
addr=2F8
Audio
Keyboard
Mouse
Diskette
addr=3Fð
Integrated Ethernet
addr=8ððð5AF67BD
SCSI cntlr id=7

.-----------. .-----------. .------.

|P=prev-page| |N=next-page| |x=Exit|
-----------' -----------' ------'

á ñ

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-25

MultiBoot Menu

à Multiboot Menu ð
1. Select Software
2. Software Default
3. Select Install Device
4. Select Boot Devices
5. OK Prompt
6. Multiboot Startup

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

===>

á ñ

Select Software: If supported by the operating system, shows the names of the
operating system installed. This option may not be supported by all operating
systems.

In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive a message saying that:
No Operating System Installed
this would mean that information in non-volatile storage could have been lost, as
would happen if the battery had been removed. In order to recreate this value, issue
the bootlist command under AIX with the appropriate parameters as to the location
of the operating system in a particular hard disk. Please see the explanation of the
bootlist command in your AIX documentation.

Software Default: If supported by the operating system, lets you select the default
operating system to start the system. This option may not be supported by all
operating systems.

Select Install Device: Produces a list of devices, for example the CD-ROM, where
the operating system is installed from. You select one of the devices and the system
searches the device for an operating system to install and if supported by the
operating system in that device, the name of the operating system displays.

Select Boot Device: Provides a list of devices that can be selected to be stored on
the boot list. Up to 5 devices are supported.

6-26 Service Guide

OK Prompt: Provides access to the Open Firmware command prompt.

Multiboot Start Option: Toggles between OFF and ON and selects if the Multiboot
menu invokes automatically on startup or not.

Select Boot Devices

This selection enables you to view and change the custom boot list, which is the
sequence of devices read at startup time.

à Select Boot Devices ð

1. Display Current Settings
2. Restore Default Settings
3. Configure 1st Boot Device
4. Configure 2nd Boot Device
5. Configure 3rd Boot Device
6. Configure 4th Boot Device
7. Configure 5th Boot Device

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

====>

á ñ

Display Current Settings: Lists the current order of devices in the boot list. The
following screen shows an example of this display.

à Current Boot Sequence ð

1. Diskette
2. Ethernet (Integrated)
3. SCSI CD-ROM id=3 (slot=1)
4. SCSI 5ððMB Hard Disk id=6 (slot=1)
5. SCSI 5ððMB Hard Disk id=5 (slot=5)

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

===>

á ñ

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-27

Restore Default Settings: Restores the boot list to the default sequence of:
Ÿ The primary diskette drive
Ÿ CD-ROM drive
Ÿ Tape id=5 (slot=1)
Ÿ Hard disk drive id=6 (Slot=1)
Ÿ Network device.

Selecting any of the Configure Boot Device options displays the following screen.

à ð
Configure Nth Boot Device

Device Number Current Position Device Name

1 1 Diskette
2 2 Ethernet
3 3 SCSI CD-ROM
4 4 SCSI 4.5GB Hard Disk
5 -

.-----------. .-----------. .------.

|P=prev-page| |N=next-page| |X=Exit|
-----------' -----------' ------'

===>

á ñ

6-28 Service Guide

Utilities

The Utilities screen enables you to select from the following system management
tools.

à ð
Utilities

1. Set Passwords and Unattended Start Mode

2. Spin-Up Delay
3. Display Error Log
4. Remote Initial Program Load Setup
5. Change SCSI id
6. Update System Firmware
7. Update Service Processor Firmware
8. Select Console

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'
===>

á ñ

Set Password and Unattended Start Mode

Entering this selection permits access to the following options.

à ð
Password Utilities

1. Set Power On Password

2. Remove Power On Password
3. Unattended Start Mode <OFF>
4. Set Privileged-Access Password
5. Remove Privileged-Access Password

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'
===>

á ñ

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-29

Set Power On Password: Setting a power-on password helps protect
information stored in your computer. You can use any combination of up to eight
characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. The password you type is not
displayed on the screen. Press Enter when you are finished; you must type the
password again for verification.

If you previously had set a power-on password and wanted to remove it, select
Remove Power-On Password.
Note: The system unit power cable must be disconnected before removing the
battery.

A password becomes effective only after the system is turned off and back on again.

Set Privileged-Access Password: The privileged-access password protects

against the unauthorized starting of the system programs.
Attention: If no user-defined boot-list exists, and the privileged-access password
has been enabled, you are asked for the privileged-access password at
startup every time you boot up your system.

If you previously had set a privileged-access password and want to remove it, select
Remove Privileged-Access Password.

6-30 Service Guide

Hard Disk Spin-Up Delay

Selecting this utility allows you to adjust the hard disk spin-up delay in your system
unit.

Display Error Log

A screen similar to the following is displayed when you select this option. Here, you
can view or clear your system unit's error log.

à ð
.----------------------------------------------------------.
| Error Log |
| |
| Date Time ErrorCode Location |
| Entry 1. ð1/ð4/96 12:13:22 25A8ðð11 ðð-ðð |
| Entry 2. no error logged |
----------------------------------------------------------'

.-----------------. .------.
|C=Clear Error Log| |X=Exit|
-----------------' ------'

á ñ

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-31

Remote Initial Program Load Setup

This option allows you to enable and set up the remote startup capability of your
computer. First, you are asked to specify the network parameters.

à ð
Network Parameters

1. IP Parameters
2. Adapter Parameters
3. Ping

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

===>

á ñ

6-32 Service Guide

Selecting the IP Parameters option displays the following screen.

à IP Parameters ð
1. Client IP Address [ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð]
2. Server IP Address [ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð]
3. Gateway IP Address [ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð]
4. Subnet Mask [ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð]

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

===>

á ñ

Selecting the Adapter Parameters option allows you to view an adapter's hardware
address, as well as configure network adapters that require setup.

à ð
Adapter Parameters

Device HW Address

1. 3Com,3C9ð5 8ððð5AFC67BD
2. token-ring 8ððð32E54A12

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

á ñ

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-33

Selecting an adapter on this screen displays configuration menus for that adapter:

à ð
3Com Etherlink Fast XL

1. Media Type [Auto]

2. Full Duplex [Auto]

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

á ñ

Selecting the Media Type option allows you the change the media employed by the
Ethernet adapter:

à ð
.----------------.
| MEDIA TYPE |
| 1. 1ð BaseT |
| 2. 1ðð Base TX |
| 3. Auto |
----------------'

á ñ

6-34 Service Guide

Selecting the Full Duplex option allows you to change how the Ethernet adapter
communicates with the network:

à ð
.----------------.
| Full Duplex |
| 1. Yes |
| 2. No |
| 3. Auto |
----------------'

á ñ

Ping, the last option available from the Network Parameters menu, allows you to test
a connection to a remote system unit. After selecting the Ping option, you must
choose which adapter communicates with the remote system.

à ð
Interface

1. Ethernet
2. Token Ring

===>

á ñ

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-35

After choosing which adapter to use to ping the remote system, you must provide the
addresses needed to communicate with the remote system.

à Ping ð
1. Client IP Address [129.132.4.2ð]
2. Server IP Address [129.132.4.1ð]
3. Gateway IP Address [129.132.4.3ð]
4. Subnet Mask [255.255.255.ð]

.---------. .------.
|E=Execute| |X=Exit|
---------' ------'

===>

á ñ

Change SCSI ID

This option allows you to view and change the addresses of the SCSI controllers
attached to you computer.

Update System or Service Processor Firmware

These options allows you to update your system or service processor firmware. Note
that you must insert a diskette containing the firmware update image after you see
the following confirmation screen.

In order to create a firmware diskette with the latest level of firmware available, see
http://www.rs6ððð.ibm.com/support/micro

When prompted, insert the firmware update diskette containing the new firmware
image.

6-36 Service Guide

à ð
.--------------------------------------------------------------.
| This selection will update your System Firmware. Do you want |
| to continue? Press Y(Yes) N(No). |
--------------------------------------------------------------'

á ñ

Firmware Recovery: If a troubleshooting procedure has indicated that the

firmware information in your system unit has been damaged, then you must perform
a firmware recovery.

To perform a firmware recovery, do the following:

1. Locate your firmware update diskette.
2. Using another system unit, rename the *.img file on the firmware update diskette
to precover.img
3. Make sure your system unit is turned off.
4. Insert the firmware recovery diskette into your system unit.
5. Turn on your system unit.
6. When the keyboard indicator appears, press the number 1 key on the system
console ASCII terminal.
7. When the System Management Services appear, choose Utilities and perform a
System Firmware Update as described above.

Chapter 6. System Management Services 6-37

Select Console: Selecting this option allows you to define which display is used
by the system for system management.

Select Language

This option allows you to change the language used by the text-based System
Management Services screens.

à ð
SELECT LANGUAGE

1. English
2. Francais
3. Deutsch
4. Italiano
5. Espanol
6. Svenska

====> .------.
|x=Exit|
------'
á ñ

Note: Your tty must support the ISO-8859 character set in order to properly display
languages other than English.

6-38 Service Guide

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures

Before performing any of the removal or replacement procedures in this chapter,

read the following notice.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous

voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet
is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.

Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power

cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.

When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,

ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before
the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power
cables from the existing system before you add a device.

Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables

to prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different
electrical potentials.

During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations ,

printers, telephones, or station protectors for communications lines.

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cable and plug for the user's
safety. Use this power cable in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical
outlet to avoid electrical shock.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-1

Handling Static–Sensitive Devices

Attention: Adapters, planars, diskette drives, and disk drives are sensitive to static
electricity discharge. These devices are wrapped in antistatic bags, as shown in this
illustration, to prevent this damage.

Take the following precautions:

Ÿ If you have an antistatic wrist strap available, use it while handling the device.
Ÿ Do not remove the device from the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the
device in the system unit.
Ÿ With the device still in its antistatic bag, touch it to a metal frame of the system.
Ÿ Grasp cards and boards by the edges. Hold drives by the frame. Avoid touching
the solder joints or pins.
Ÿ If you need to lay the device down while it is out of the antistatic bag, lay it on
the antistatic bag. Before picking it up again, touch the antistatic bag and the
metal frame of the system unit at the same time.
Ÿ Handle the devices carefully in order to prevent permanent damage.

7-2 Service Guide

Procedure List

Which removal and replacement procedure are you going to perform?

Ÿ Covers: Go to “Covers” on page 7-5.
Ÿ Processor and Memory Card Cover: Go to “Removal of Processor and Memory
Card Cover” on page 7-10.
Ÿ Memory Cards: Go to “Memory Cards” on page 7-11.
Ÿ Memory Modules: Go to “Memory Modules” on page 7-14.
Ÿ Processor Card: Go to “Processor Card” on page 7-17.
Ÿ Adapters: Go to “Adapters” on page 7-20.
Ÿ Internal Drives: Go to “Internal Drives” on page 7-22.
Ÿ Disk Drives: Go to “Disk Drives” on page 7-23.
Ÿ Configuration or Deconfiguration of Media Drives: Go to “Configuration or
Deconfiguration of Media Drives” on page 7-26.
Ÿ Battery: Go to “Battery” on page 7-27.
Ÿ System Board: Go to “System Board” on page 7-30.
Ÿ I/O Board: Go to “I/O Board” on page 7-33.
Ÿ Power Supply: Go to “Power Supply” on page 7-35.
Ÿ Operator Panel: Go to “Operator Panel” on page 7-37.
Ÿ CEC Fan: Go to “CEC Fan” on page 7-38.
Ÿ I/O Fan: Go to “I/O Fan” on page 7-39.
Ÿ Disk Drive Cage: Go to “Disk Drive Cage” on page 7-40.
Ÿ CD-ROM, Tape Drive, Diskette Drive: Go to “CD-ROM Drive, Tape Drive,
Diskette Drive” on page 7-42

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-3

Stopping the System Unit
Attention: When using the shutdown procedure for your system, follow the correct
shutdown procedure before you stop the system unit. Failure to do so may
result in the loss of data.
1. At a command line, enter shutdown -F to stop the operating system.
2. After you shut down the operating system, set the power switches of any
attached devices to Off.
3. The system unit is powered down by the shut down procedure.

7-4 Service Guide

Covers

Removal of Covers
1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. To remove the front cover, grasp the front cover at the top and bottom as shown.
Pull the cover out at the bottom first to ease removal.

Grasp Here
and Pull

Grasp Here
and Pull

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-5

 3. To remove the rear cover, lift the cover up and away from the system.

7-6 Service Guide

4. To remove the side covers,
a. Remove the screws that hold the side covers to the rear frame.

Left Side
Right Side
Cover Thumb
Cover Screws (6)
Screws (5)

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-7

 b. Slide the covers to the rear and remove.

7-8 Service Guide

5. To remove the top cover, remove the screw at the front and the two screws at
the rear and lift the cover off. (The side covers must have been removed
previously).

Replacement of Covers
1. To replace the top cover, place the cover on top of the system and secure with
the screws removed earlier.
2. To replace the side covers:
a. Insert the tabs on the side covers into the slots on the enclosure.
b. Slide the covers toward the front of the enclosure until it latches into place.
c. Secure the rear of the covers with the screws removed earlier.
3. To replace the front cover, align the tabs on the front cover with the slots on the
system unit enclosure. Insert the front cover until it is secure.
4. To replace the rear cover, align the tabs on the side covers with the slots on the
rear cover and slide the cover down until it latches into place.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-9

Processor and Memory Card Cover

Removal of Processor and Memory Card Cover

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear, and left side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. Remove the thumb screw securing the processor and memory card cover and
remove the cover.

Replacement of Processor and Memory Card Cover

To replace the processor and memory card cover, perform the removal steps in the
reverse order.

7-10 Service Guide

Memory Cards

Removal of Memory Cards

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear, and left side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. Remove the processor and memory card cover as described in “Removal of
Processor and Memory Card Cover” on page 7-10.
5. Remove the memory card shield from in between the two memory cards.
6. The card is secured in place with latches at each end of its connection to the
system board. Open the card latches and remove the card.
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and to the card connectors, open
and close the latches at the same time.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-11

Replacement of Memory Cards
1. With one hand, touch any metal surface of the chassis to minimize static
electrical charges, and them pick up the memory card.
2. Open the retainer latches.

3. If only one memory card is installed, it should be installed in the primary slot (J2).
4. Place the memory card into the card guide rails.

7-12 Service Guide

 5. Make sure that the black tabs on the new card are captured by the latches.
6. Align the card with the connector.
7. Firmly insert the card into the connector.
8. Close the retainer latches to secure the card into the connector.
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and to the card connectors, open
and close the retainer latches at the same time.
9. Install the memory card shield between the two memory cards.
10. Replace the processor and memory card cover “Replacement of Processor and
Memory Card Cover” on page 7-10.
11. Replace the system unit covers as described in “Replacement of Covers” on
page 7-9.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-13

Memory Modules

Removal of Memory Modules

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear and left side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. If you have not already done so, remove the processor and memory card cover
as described in “Removal of Processor and Memory Card Cover” on page 7-10.
5. If you have not already done so, remove the memory card as described in
“Removal of Memory Cards” on page 7-11.
6. Locate the memory module connectors and determine which module you want to
remove.

Slot J15 Slot J16

Slot J13 Slot J14
Slot J11 Slot J12

Slot J9 Slot J10

Slot J8
Slot J7
Slot J6
Slot J5
Slot J4
Slot J3
Slot J2
Slot J1

7-14 Service Guide

7. Remove the memory module by pushing the tabs out on the memory connectors.

Replacement of Memory Modules

1. With one hand, touch any metal surface of the chassis to minimize static
electrical charges, and them pick up the memory module.
2. Locate the memory module connector on the memory card.
Note: Memory modules must be installed in pairs and in the correct slot
configuration. (Slots J1 and J2, J3 and J4, J5 and J6, etc.)
3. Insert the memory module firmly into the connector.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-15

 4. Secure the memory module with the locking tabs located at each end of the
connector.
5. Replace the memory card into the system unit. See “Replacement of Memory
Cards” on page 7-12 for more information.
6. Replace the processor and memory card cover as described in “Replacement of
Processor and Memory Card Cover” on page 7-10.
7. Replace the system unit covers as described in “Replacement of Covers” on
page 7-9.

7-16 Service Guide

Processor Card

Removal of Processor Card

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear, and left side covers
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. Remove the processor and memory card cover as described in “Removal of
Processor and Memory Card Cover” on page 7-10.
5. The processor card is secured in place with card retainer latches, one on each
end of the card. Open the card retainer latches and remove the card from the
connector.
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open and
close the retainer latches at the same time.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-17

Replacement of Processor Card

Installing a processor card into your system unit may require updating the firmware.
A diskette or CD-ROM is included with your new processor card if that is required.
Attention: If your system unit has two processor cards, both processor cards must
be of the same clock speed.
1. If you have not already done so, open the card retainer latches on both ends of
the card connector.

7-18 Service Guide

2. Place the processor card in the processor card guide rails.
3. Carefully align the processor card with the card connector.
4. Firmly insert the processor card into the card connector.
5. Close the retainer latches to secure the processor card. Ensure that the
processor card is fully seated.
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and to the card connectors, open
and close the retainer latches at the same time.
6. Replace the processor and memory card cover as described in “Replacement of
Processor and Memory Card Cover” on page 7-10.
7. Replace the system unit covers as described in “Replacement of Covers” on
page 7-9.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-19

Adapters

Removal of Adapters
1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear, and left side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. Record the slot number and location of the adapter being removed.
5. Label any cables attached to the adapter being removed.
6. Disconnect any cables that are connected to the adapter being removed.
7. Remove the screw that holds the adapter bracket to the system unit.
8. Remove the adapter from the system unit.

7-20 Service Guide

Replacement of Adapters
1. If you are not installing another adapter in this slot location, replace the
expansion slot cover. Slide the cover over the expansion slot and tighten the
screw on the top of the expansion slot cover.
2. Carefully grasp the adapter by the edges and align the adapter with the
expansion-slot connector.
3. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion-slot connector.
4. Use the screw you removed earlier from the expansion-slot cover to secure the
adapter card bracket to the system unit.
5. Connect any cables you removed earlier to the adapter.
6. Replace the system unit covers as described in “Replacement of Covers” on
page 7-9.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-21

Internal Drives

The 7043 Model 260 has 5 internal media bays.

Ÿ One 3.5 inch diskette bay
Ÿ Two 5.25 inch media bays, for CD-ROM drives, tape drives, or disk drives.
Ÿ Two 3.5 inch disk drive bays.

A diskette drive and CD-ROM drive come preinstalled in all systems.

Pre-installation Steps

Consider the following cautions when installing or removing media drives into your
system unit.
Ÿ Use caution when handling all disk drives. Disk drives are more likely to be
damaged during installation and service than at any other time. A fall of as little
as .25 inch, bumping, or rough handling can all cause latent failures.
Ÿ Media drives are particularly sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Follow the
electro-static handling procedures prior to handling the media drive.
Ÿ Refer to the documentation that came with your drive to determine if any
drive-specific procedures must be followed, such as setting switches or jumpers,
or attaching the drive to a carrier tray.
Ÿ Media SCSI drives must have their SCSI address set manually. Refer to the
documentation that came with your drive for more information on setting the
SCSI address. Refer to “SCSI IDs and Bay Locations” on page 1-6 for more
information on SCSI addresses in your system unit.

7-22 Service Guide

Disk Drives

Removal of Disk Drives

1. Deconfigure the drive you wish to remove. See “Deconfiguration of Media
Drives” on page 7-26 for instructions.
2. If you have not already done so, remove the front cover as described in “Covers”
on page 7-5.
3. If the system has a padlock or cable securing the disk drive cage, remove the
padlock or cable.
4. Loosen the retaining screw that secures the disk drive cage cover to the disk
drive cage and remove the cover.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-23

 5. Locate the drive you wish to remove.
6. Pull the disk drive lever toward you and remove the drive unit from the system
unit .

Pull Lever
To Front

Replacement of Disk Drives

1. Align the drive with the disk drive cage rails.
2. Slide the drive into the system unit until it connects with the backplane at the
rear of the drive bay.
3. Configure the drive using smit. Then wait five minutes for the drive to warmup.
See “Configuration of Media Drives” on page 7-26 for instructions on configuring
the drive.

7-24 Service Guide

Removal of Disk Drives from Carrier
1. If you have not already done so, remove the drive and carrier from the system
unit. See “Removal of Disk Drives” on page 7-23 for instructions.
2. Loosen and remove screws A and B first.
3. Loosen and remove screws C and D.
4. Remove the drive from the carrier.

Installation of Disk Drives into Carrier

1. Align the drive with the carrier so that ...
2. Insert the unit into the carrier.
3. Insert and tighten the screws in the following order:
A
B
C
D

B D

A C

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-25

Configuration or Deconfiguration of Media Drives

Configuration of Media Drives

If you need to configure a disk drive, use the following procedure:

1. Login as root.
2. Enter the smit command.
3. Select Devices.
4. Determine the type of disk drive you want to configure. Select that type of drive
from the menu.
5. Select Add a drive type, where drive type is the type of drive you are
configuring.
6. A list will appear listing various models of the drive type you selected. Select the
specific type of drive you are adding.

Deconfiguration of Media Drives

1. Login as root.
2. Enter the smit command.
3. Select Devices.
4. Determine the type of disk drive you want to remove or deconfigure. Select that
type of drive from the menu.
5. When you get to the Keep Definition option, select Yes. This selection retains
the details of the drive in the device configuration database.
6. A list will appear listing various models of the drive type you selected. Select the
specific type of drive you are removing.
7. Select the Do option to unconfigure the drive.

7-26 Service Guide

Battery
CAUTION:
A lithium battery can cause fire, explosion, or a severe burn. Do not recharge,
disassemble, heat above 100°C (212°F), solder directly to the cell, incinerate, or
expose cell contents to water. Keep away from children. Replace only with the
part number specified for your system. Use of another battery may present a
risk of fire or explosion.

The battery connector is polarized; do not attempt to reverse polarity.

Dispose of the battery according to local regulations.

Removal of Battery
1. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear, and left side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
2. Remove the processor and memory card cover as described in “Processor and
Memory Card Cover” on page 7-10.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-27

 3. Locate the battery on the I/O board.

Battery (P/N 15F8409)

7-28 Service Guide

4. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward the front of the server. (The
spring mechanism behind the battery pushes it out toward you as you slide it
forward.) Use your thumb and index finger to hold the battery as it pushes out of
the socket.

Replacement of Battery
1. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the front of the socket. As you slide
the battery toward the front of the server, push it down into the socket.

Note: Be sure to tell the customer that the time and date need to be reset.
If running AIX the bootlist command may have to be run from AIX while
logged in as root, this would restore the custom boot list and allow the
option of Select Software under multiboot to start the operating system.
Other parameters that may have to be rebuilt are the IP parameters.
Ensure that the battery polarity is correct; place the battery in the holder
with the positive side facing up.
2. Replace the processor and memory card cover.
3. Replace the system unit covers as described in “Replacement of Covers” on
page 7-9.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-29

System Board

Removal of System Board

Attention: Be certain to record the location of any component prior to removal or
disconnection. Record the settings of any jumpers on the board prior to
removing it from the system unit.
1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear and left side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. If you have not already done so, remove the processor and memory card cover
as described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
5. If you have not already done so, remove the disk drive cage as described in
“Disk Drive Cage” on page 7-40.
6. Remove the processor cards from the system unit. Refer to “Removal of
Processor Card” on page 7-17 for more information.
7. Remove the memory cards from the system unit. Refer to “Removal of Memory
Cards” on page 7-11 for more information.

7-30 Service Guide

 8. Remove the retaining screws that secure the processor and memory card
bracket to the system unit.

Processor and
Memory Card
Bracket

9. Remove the processor and memory card bracket by sliding it straight out away
from the system.
10. Disconnect the power cables from the system board connectors (J5 and J7).
11. Remove the screws that secure the system board to the system unit.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-31

12. Slide the system board up to disconnect it from the I/O board
Attention: Take great care not to bend the connector between the system
board and the I/O board.
System
Board

I/O Board

13. Carefully remove the system board from the system unit.

Replacement of System Board

To replace the system board, perform the removal steps in the reverse order.
Carefully connect the system board and I/O board. Hold the system board in place
while inserting holding screws.

7-32 Service Guide

I/O Board

Removal of I/O Board

Attention: Be certain to record the location of any component prior to removal or
disconnection.
Attention: Record the settings of any jumpers on the board prior to removing it
from the system unit.
1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear, and left side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. If you have not already done so, remove the system board as described in
“Removal of System Board” on page 7-30.
5. Remove the I/O fan as described in “I/O Fan” on page 7-39.
6. Record the location of all cables at the rear of the system unit.
7. Disconnect all cables from the rear of the system unit.
8. Record the location of all adapter cards and remove the adapters from the
system unit. Refer to “Removal of Adapters” on page 7-20 for more information.
9. Disconnect all cables from the connectors on the I/O board.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-33

10. Remove the screws that secure the I/O board connectors to the rear of the
system unit.

I/O Board
Connectors

11. Remove the screws that secure the I/O board to the system unit.
12. Remove the I/O board from the system unit by carefully sliding it out away from
the system unit. Ensure that all of the rear connectors on the I/O board clear the
system unit frame.

Replacement of I/O Board

To replace the I/O board, perform the removal steps in the reverse order.

7-34 Service Guide

Power Supply
DANGER

Do not attempt to open the covers of the power supply. Power

supplies are not serviceable and are to be replaced as a unit.

Removal of Power Supply

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove all of the covers as described in
“Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. Remove the media devices as described in “CD-ROM Drive, Tape Drive,
Diskette Drive” on page 7-42.
5. Remove the disk drives as described in “Disk Drives” on page 7-23
6. Remove the screws that secure the disk drive cage as described in “Removal of
Disk Drive Cage” on page 7-40. Do not disconnect the cables from the
backplane. Slide the disk drive cage forward enough that the power supply can
be removed.
7. Disconnect the six power cables from the power supply connectors in the
following order (P3, P4, P6, P5, P2 ,and P1). Ensure that the cables allow
clearance for power supply removal.
Power
Supply

Front View Side View

P1
P2
P5

P6 P4 P3

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-35

 8. Remove the power cables from the I/O board connectors (J16 and J19).
9. Remove the retaining screws that secure the power supply to the rear of the
system unit.

Power
Supply

Screws (4)

10. Remove the retaining screws that secure the power supply to the top of the
system unit.

Screws

Power
Supply

Attention: When removing the power supply ensure that the power supply does
not drop down and damage the I/O board components or connectors.
11. Slide the power supply slightly toward the front of the system unit to disengage
the power supply retainer from the top and right side of the system frame.
12. Carefully remove the power supply from the system unit.

Replacement of Power Supply

To replace the power supply, perform the removal steps in the reverse order. Ensure
that the power supply retainer engages with the top and right side of the system
frame. This assists in proper alignment of the power supply screws.

7-36 Service Guide

Operator Panel

Removal of Operator Panel

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front cover as described in
“Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. Remove the retaining screws (4) that secure the operator panel to the front of
the system unit.

Operator
Panel

5. Slide the operator panel out from the system unit.

6. Remove the screw that secures the audio cable to the operator panel.
7. Disconnect the cables from the rear of the operator panel.

Replacement of Operator Panel

Perform the removal steps in the reverse order.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-37

CEC Fan

Removal of CEC Fan

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, back and right side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. Remove the retaining screws (11) that secure the rear fan assembly to the
system unit.

CEC Fan
Assembly

5. Disconnect the fan from the connector in the cable.

6. Pull the rear fan assembly out from the system unit.

Replacement of CEC Fan

When replacing the fan assembly, insert the left side first to ensure proper seal.
Perform the removal steps in the reverse order.

7-38 Service Guide

I/O Fan

Removal of I/O Fan

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front cover as described in
“Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. Remove the retaining screws that secure the front fan assembly to the system
unit.

Front Fan
Assembly

5. Slide the front fan assembly out of the system unit.

6. Disconnect the fan connector (J3) from the I/O board.

Replacement of I/O Fan

Perform the removal steps in the reverse order.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-39

Disk Drive Cage

Removal of Disk Drive Cage

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear and side cover as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5.
4. If the system has a padlock or cable securing the disk drive cage, remove the
padlock or cable.
5. Loosen the retaining screw that secures the disk drive cage cover to the disk
drive cage and remove the cover.

6. If you have not already done so, remove the disk drives as described in “Disk
Drives” on page 7-23.
7. Remove the retaining screws that secure the disk drive cage to the front of the
system unit.
8. Record the cable locations and disconnect the cables from the backplane
connectors.
9. Remove the retaining screws that secure the back of the disk drive cage
assembly to the system unit.

7-40 Service Guide

10. Remove the disk drive cage from the system unit.

Screws

Disk
Drive
Cage

Replacement of Disk Drive Cage

Perform the removal steps in the reverse order.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-41

CD-ROM Drive, Tape Drive, Diskette Drive

CAUTION:
Do not open the drive; no user adjustments or serviceable parts are inside.

Removal of Media Drives

1. If you have not already done so, shutdown the system as described in “Stopping
the System Unit” on page 7-4.
2. If you have not already done so, unplug the system unit power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. If you have not already done so, remove the front, rear, and left side covers as
described in “Removal of Covers” on page 7-5. It may help removal if you
remove the right cover but it is not necessary at this time.
4. Remove the screws that secure the media drive to the system unit.
5. Slide the drive forward toward the front of the system unit.

6. Disconnect the power and data cables from the drive you are removing.
7. If you are removing a CD-ROM drive, disconnect the audio cable from the rear of
the CD-ROM drive.

7-42 Service Guide

Replacement of Media Drives
1. Align the drive with the guides at the edge of the bay.
2. Slide the drive into the system unit until it stops.
3. The diskette drive requires a 16-Bit to 8-Bit adapter to be installed between the
connector at the rear of the drive and the data cable. Install this adapter at this
time.
4. Connect the cables from the front of the system.
a. Locate the appropriate data cable for the drive. Connect the cable to the
connector at the rear of the drive.
b. If you are installing a CD-ROM drive, connect the audio cable from the I/O
board to the audio connector at the rear of the drive.
c. If you are installing a SCSI drive, set the SCSI address jumpers at the rear
of the drive to the correct address. Refer to the documentation that came
with your drive for details on setting the SCSI address.
d. The two media bays share a common power cable. Connect an available
connector on the power cable to the 4-pin connector at the rear of the drive.
5. Secure the media drive to the system unit with the retaining screws.
6. Replace the system unit covers as described in “Replacement of Covers” on
page 7-9.

Chapter 7. Removal and Replacement Procedures 7-43

7-44 Service Guide
Chapter 8. Parts Information

Chapter 8. Parts Information 8-1

 3
7
5

6
8
4
10
9
2

1
11

25
12

13 14

24
23

22
19
15
17
20 16
21

18

8-2 Service Guide

 Index Part Number Units Per Description
1 74G6355 1 Chassis assembly
24L1910 1 Chassis assembly (OEM)
2 74G6361 1 Fan assembly (CEC)
3 97H9415 1 Rear cover
24L1903 1 Rear cover (OEM)
4 74G6349 1 Operator Panel Bracket
5 07L7234 1 Operator panel
6 97H9302 1 Disk drive cage (includes backplane)
7 97H9337 1 Power supply
8 97H5936 1 Top cover
9 See note 2 Disk drive
10 97H9336 2 Disk drive carrier
11 See note 1 Media device
12 07H7608 1 CD-ROM drive
13 76H4091 1 Diskette drive
14 97H9404 1 Front cover
24L1900 1 Front cover (OEM)
15 97H9425 1 Fan assembly (PCI)
16 84H3427 1 or 2 Memory card
17 42H2773 Up to 32 32 MB Memory module
42H2775 Up to 32 128 MB Memory module
18 08L1013 1 or 2 Processor card(200 Mhz)
19 See note Up to 5 Adapter
20 97H5937 2 Side cover
21 97H9432 A/R PCI air duct
22 08L1303 1 System board
23 08L0633 1 I/O board
24 15F8409 1 Battery
25 97H9424 1 Processor and memory card cage

Note: See IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems for part
numbers.

Chapter 8. Parts Information 8-3

 1
6 Power
Power Supply
P1 Audio CD ROM
Fan P2 7 SCSI

P3 Power
2 Media
Device
SCSI
8
10 9 P5 P4 J10 3 Power
Data Diskette
J17 J7
J7 J5 4
Power
11 SCSI Op
System Board P6 Panel
Audio
Disk
Drives
5
J1

J2

I/O Board

Index Part Number Units Per Description

1 24L1909 1 Cable (Media devices power)
2 97H9321 1 Cable (CD-ROM audio)
3 97H9322 1 Cable (Media and disk drive SCSI)
4 93H9328 1 Cable (Operator panel power)
5 97H9442 1 Cable (Operator panel audio)
6 97H9315 1 Cable (Power, system board)
7 97H9316 1 Cable (Power, system board)
8 97H9320 1 Cable (Diskette signal)
9 97H9327 1 Cable (Includes both Tablet and Ethernet
cables)
10 97H9323 1 Cable (Tablet signal)
11 97H9324 1 Cable (AUI Ethernet signal)
76H0518 1 Cable (SCSI converter)

8-4 Service Guide

Keyboards and Mouse

Index FRU Part Number Units Per Description

Number Assy
1 93H8120 1 Keyboard, 101 United States English (ID 103P)
93H8121 1 Keyboard, 102 Canada French (ID 058)
93H8122 1 Keyboard, 102 Canada French (ID 445)
93H8123 1 Keyboard, 102 Spanish (ID 171)
93H8124 1 Keyboard, 104 Brazil Portuguese (ID 275)
93H8125 1 Keyboard, 102 Arabic (ID 238)
93H8126 1 Keyboard, 102 Belgium French (ID 120)
93H8127 1 Keyboard, 102 Belgium (ID 120)
93H8128 1 Keyboard, 102 Bulgarian (ID 442)
93H8129 1 Keyboard, 102 Czech (ID 243)
93H8130 1 Keyboard, 102 Danish (ID 159)
93H8131 1 Keyboard, 102 Dutch (ID 143)
93H8132 1 Keyboard, 102 French (ID 189)
93H8133 1 Keyboard, 102 German (ID 129)
93H8134 1 Keyboard, 102 Greek (ID 319)
93H8135 1 Keyboard, 101 Hebrew (ID 212)
93H8136 1 Keyboard, 102 Hungarian (ID 208)
93H8137 1 Keyboard, 102 Iceland (ID 197)
93H8138 1 Keyboard, 102 Italy (ID 142)
93H8139 1 Keyboard, 102 Norwegian (ID 155)
93H8140 1 Keyboard, 102 Polish (ID 214)
93H8141 1 Keyboard, 102 Portuguese (ID 163)
93H8142 1 Keyboard, 102 Romainian (ID 446)
93H8143 1 Keyboard, 101 Russian (ID 443)
93H8144 1 Keyboard, 102 Serbian (ID 118)
93H8145 1 Keyboard, 102 Slovak (ID 245)
93H8146 1 Keyboard, 102 Spanish (ID 172)
93H8147 1 Keyboard, 102 Sweden/Finland (ID 153)
93H8148 1 Keyboard, 105 Swiss F/G (ID 150)
93H8149 1 Keyboard, 102 Turkish (ID 179)
93H8150 1 Keyboard, 102 Turkish (ID 440)
93H8151 1 Keyboard, 102 UK English (ID 166)
93H8152 1 Keyboard, 102 Latvia (ID 234)
93H8153 1 Keyboard, US English ISO9995 (ID 103P)
93H8154 1 Keyboard, 106 Japan (ID 194)
93H8155 1 Keyboard, 101 Chinese/US (ID 467)
93H8156 1 Keyboard, 103 Korea (ID 413)
93H8157 1 Keyboard, 101 Thailand (ID 191)
2 76H5084 1 Three Button Mouse

Chapter 8. Parts Information 8-5

Keyboards and Mouse (Black)

Index FRU Part Number Units Per Description

Number Assy
1 07L9446 1 Keyboard, 101 United States English (ID 103P)
07L9447 1 Keyboard, 102 Canada French (ID 058)
07L9448 1 Keyboard, 102 Canada French (ID 445)
07L9449 1 Keyboard, 102 Spanish (ID 171)
07L9450 1 Keyboard, 104 Brazil Portuguese (ID 275)
07L9451 1 Keyboard, 102 Arabic (ID 238)
07L9452 1 Keyboard, 102 Belgium French (ID 120)
07L9453 1 Keyboard, 102 Belgium (ID 120)
07L9454 1 Keyboard, 102 Bulgarian (ID 442)
07L9455 1 Keyboard, 102 Czech (ID 243)
07L9456 1 Keyboard, 102 Danish (ID 159)
07L9457 1 Keyboard, 102 Dutch (ID 143)
07L9458 1 Keyboard, 102 French (ID 189)
07L9459 1 Keyboard, 102 German (ID 129)
07L9460 1 Keyboard, 102 Greek (ID 319)
07L9461 1 Keyboard, 101 Hebrew (ID 212)
07L9462 1 Keyboard, 102 Hungarian (ID 208)
07L9463 1 Keyboard, 102 Iceland (ID 197)
07L9464 1 Keyboard, 102 Italy (ID 142)
07L9465 1 Keyboard, 102 Norwegian (ID 155)
07L9466 1 Keyboard, 102 Polish (ID 214)
07L9467 1 Keyboard, 102 Portuguese (ID 163)
07L9468 1 Keyboard, 102 Romainian (ID 446)
07L9469 1 Keyboard, 101 Russian (ID 443)
07L9470 1 Keyboard, 102 Serbian (ID 118)
07L9471 1 Keyboard, 102 Slovak (ID 245)
07L9472 1 Keyboard, 102 Spanish (ID 172)
07L9473 1 Keyboard, 102 Sweden/Finland (ID 153)
07L9474 1 Keyboard, 105 Swiss F/G (ID 150)
07L9475 1 Keyboard, 102 Turkish (ID 179)
07L9476 1 Keyboard, 102 Turkish (ID 440)
07L9477 1 Keyboard, 102 UK English (ID 166)
07L9478 1 Keyboard, 102 Latvia (ID 234)
07L9479 1 Keyboard, US English ISO9995 (ID 103P)
07L9480 1 Keyboard, 106 Japan (ID 194)
07L9481 1 Keyboard, 101 Chinese/US (ID 467)
07L9482 1 Keyboard, 103 Korea (ID 413)
07L9483 1 Keyboard, 101 Thailand (ID 191)
2 08L0362 1 Three Button Mouse (Black)

8-6 Service Guide

Power Cables

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

8 9 10 11

Index Part Number Country

1 1838574 Bahamas, Barbados, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Costa Rica,
Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Ecuador, Guatemala, Guyana,
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan, Netherlands Antilles, Panama,
Peru, Philippines, Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad, Tobago, U.S.A.
(except Chicago), Venezuela
2 6952300 Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman
Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan,
Korea (South), Mexico, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama,
Peru, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Suriname, Trinidad,
Taiwan, U.S.A. (except Chicago), Venezuela
2 62X1045 Chicago, U.S.A.
3 6952311 Argentina, Australia, New Zealand
4 13F9979 Abu Dhabi, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Botswana, Egypt, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Iceland, Indonesia, Korea (South),
Lebanon, Luxembourg, Macau, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Saudi Arabia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Turkey, Yugoslavia
5 13F9997 Denmark
6 14F0015 Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka
7 14F0033 Bahrain, Bermuda, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus, Ghana,
Hong Kong, India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi,
Malaysia, Nigeria, Oman, People's Republic of China, Qatar,
Sierra Leone, Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda, United Arab
Emirates (Dubai), United Kingdom, Zambia

Chapter 8. Parts Information 8-7

 Index Part Number Country
8 14F0051 Liechtenstein, Switzerland
9 14F0069 Chile, Ethiopia, Italy
10 14F0087 Israel
11 6952291 Paraguay, Colombia, Uruguay

8-8 Service Guide

Appendix A. Service Processor Information

The Service Processor menus enable you to configure Service Processor options
and to enable and disable functions.

Service Processor menus are available using an ASCII terminal when the server is
powered off and the Service Processor is operating with standby power. Service
Processor menus are also available when server power is on and the Service
Processor has detected a server problem (such as loss of surveillance).

During the first power up (i.e. power cord is plugged into the outlet), Service
Processor menus are not available for 45 seconds while the Service Processor is
running self-tests and initializing the server. If the server powers down, Service
Processor menus become available after 15 seconds.

For a summary of the Service Processor functions and the methods for invoking
them, see the table on page A-2.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-1

 Service Processor Functions Service Service SMS
Processor Processor (ASCII or
Menus Service graphics
(ASCII Aids terminals)
terminals) (ASCII or
graphics
terminals)
Read VPD Y3 Y3
View System Environmental Conditions Y3
Read System POST Errors Y3
Read Service Processor Error Logs Y3
View Progress Indicators from last Boot Y3
Power-on System Y3
Power-off System Y2
Read NVRAM Y2
Reset Service Processor Y2
Setup Reboot/Restart Policy Y2
Start Talk Mode Y2
Enable/Disable Console Mirroring Y2 Y1
2
Select Modem Line Speed Y Y1
Enable/Disable Modem Y2 Y1
Setup Modem Configuration Y2 Y1
2
Setup Ring Indicate Power-On Y Y1
Setup Dial-out Phone Numbers Y2 Y1
Setup Surveillance Y2 Y1
2
Update Service Processor Flash EPROM Y Y1 Y2
Change General Access Password Y2 Y2
Change Privileged Access Password Y2 Y2
Select Language Y2 Y2
2
Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode Y Y2

1 Operating system root password

2 Privileged access password
3 General access (power-on) password

A-2 Service Guide

Service Processor Menus

The Service Processor menus are divided into two groups:

Ÿ General user menus - the user must know the general access password.
Ÿ Privileged user menus - the user must know the privileged access password.

The following section describes these two groups of menus, how to access them,
and the functions associated with each option.

When the server is powered down, the Service Processor menus may be accessed
locally or remotely.

Service Processor Menu Inactivity

To prevent loss of control in unstable power environments, the Service Processor

leaves the menu mode after 5 minutes of inactivity. Menus may be resumed by
pressing any key on the terminal, local or remote.

How to access Service Processor menus locally

Service Processor menus may be accessed locally by connecting an ASCII terminal

to either serial port. Because the presence of the ASCII terminal cannot be
confirmed by the Service Processor, you must press a key on the ASCII terminal to
confirm its presence. Next the Service Processor prompts you for a password (if
set), and when verified, displays the Service Processor menus.

How to access Service Processor menus remotely

Service Processor menus may be accessed remotely by connecting a modem to

serial port 1 or serial port 2.
Ÿ Power off the server, unplug the power cord, and press the power button to drain
capacitance while power is disconnected.
Ÿ Connect the modem to the appropriate serial port and turn the modem on.
Ÿ Plug in the server.
Note: If your modem has not been configured, go to “CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP
MENU” on page A-19.

With a terminal or terminal emulator, call the server's modem. The Service
Processor prompts you for a password (if set), and when verified, displays the
Service Processor menus.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-3

General User Menus

The menu options presented to the General user are a subset of the options
available to the Privileged user. The user must know the General Access Password
in order to access these menus.

à ð
GENERAL USER MENU

1. Power-On System
2. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot
3. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot
4. Read Service Processor Error Logs
5. Read System POST Errors
6. View System Environmental Conditions
99. Exit from Menus

1>
á ñ
Note: The Service Processor prompt reads either 1> or 2> to indicate which serial
port on the system unit is being used to communicate with the Service
Processor.
Ÿ Power-On System
Allows the user to power-on the system.
Ÿ Read VPD Image from Last System Boot
Displays the VPD information that was in effect after the last system boot. This
information is usually identical with the results from the menu selection "Read
VPD," but in the case of configuration updates or certain faults, this historical
comparison can be useful to System Administrators and service personnel.
Ÿ Read Progress Indicators from last Boot
Displays the boot progress indicators (check points), up to a maximum of 100,
from the system boot prior to the one in progress now. This historical
information may be useful to help diagnose system faults.
The progress indicators are displayed in two sections. Above the dashed line
are the progress indicators (latest) from the boot that produced the current
sessions. Below the dashed line are progress indicators (oldest) from the boot
preceding the one that produced the current sessions.
The progress indication codes are listed top (latest) to bottom (oldest). The
dashed line merely represents the point where the latest boot started.
Use the posted code indicated by the <-- arrow.

A-4 Service Guide

Ÿ Read Service Processor Error Logs
Displays the Service Processor error logs.
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available
and are able to time stamp with local time. See page A-37 for an example of the
error log.
Ÿ Read System POST Errors
Selecting this item lets you review the results of the POST (Power-On Self Test).
Your server may be able to start in the presence of POST errors if there is
sufficient working system resources. If POST errors occur during start-up, this
error log when used with the diagnostics helps to isolate faults. See page A-38
for an example of the POST error screen.
Ÿ View System Environmental Conditions
On selection of this menu, the Service Processor reads all environmental
sensors and reports the results to the user. This option maybe useful when
surveillance fails, as it allows the user to determine the environmental conditions
that may be related to the failure. See page A-15 for an example of the System
Environmental Conditions screen.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-5

Privileged User Menus

The following menus are available to privileged users only. The user must know the
Privileged Access Password in order to access these menus.

MAIN MENU

At the top of the MAIN Menu is a listing containing:

Ÿ Your Service Processor's current firmware version
Ÿ The firmware copyright notice
Ÿ The System Name given to your server during setup

You need the firmware version for reference when you either update or repair the
functions of your service processor.

The System Name, an optional field, is the name your server reports in problem
messages. This name helps your support team, (for example, your system
administrator, network administrator, or service representative) to more quickly
identify the location, configuration, and history of your server. The System Name is
set from the Main Menu using option 6.

A-6 Service Guide

Note: The information under the Service Processor Firmware heading in the Main
Menu example that follows is example information only.

à ð
Service Processor Firmware
EPROM: 1997ð915
FLASH: 1997ð512
Copyright 1997, IBM Corporation
SYSTEM NAME

MAIN MENU

1. Service Processor Setup Menu

2. System Power Control Menu
3. System Information Menu
4. Language Selection Menu
5. Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu
6. Set System Name
99. Exit from Menus

1>
á ñ

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-7

Service Processor SETUP MENU

à ð
Service Processor SETUP MENU

1. Change Privileged Access Password

2. Change General Access Password
3. Enable/Disable Console Mirroring:
Currently Disabled
4. Start Talk Mode
5. OS Surveillance Setup Menu
6. Reset Service Processor
7. Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM
98. Return to Previous Menu
99. Exit from Menus

1>
á ñ
Note
Unless otherwise stated in menu responses settings become effective when a
menu is exited using option 98 or 99.

A-8 Service Guide

Passwords

Passwords can be any combination of up to 8 alphanumeric characters. You can

enter longer passwords, but the entries are truncated to include only the first 8
characters. Passwords can be set from the Service Processor menu or from the
SMS menus.

For security purposes, the Service Processor counts the number of attempts to enter
correct passwords. The results of not recognizing a correct password within this
error threshold are different, depending on whether the attempts are being made
locally (at the server) or remotely (via a modem). The error threshold is 3.

If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords at the server, the
Service Processor exits the menus. This action is taken based on the assumption
that the server is in an adequately secure location with only authorized users having
access. Such users must still successfully enter a login password to access AIX.

If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords remotely, the

Service Processor disconnects the modem to prevent potential security attacks on
the server by unauthorized remote users.

The following illustrates what you can access with the Privileged Access Password
and the General Access Password.

Privileged General Resulting Menu

Access Access
Password Password
None None MAIN MENU displayed
None Set MAIN MENU displayed
Set None User's with password see the MAIN MENU
Others users see the GENERAL USER MENU
Set Set Users see menus associated with the entered password

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-9

 Ÿ Change Privileged Access Password
Set or change the Privileged Access Password. It provides the user with the
capability to access all Service Processor functions. This password is usually
used by the system administrator or root user.
Ÿ Change General Access Password
Set or change the General Access Password. It provides limited access to
Service Processor menus, and is usually available to all users who are allowed
to power-on the server.
Ÿ Enable/Disable Console Mirroring
When Console Mirroring is enabled, the Service Processor sends information to
both serial ports. This capability may be enabled by local or remote users. This
provides local users the capability to monitor remote sessions. Console mirroring
may be enabled for the current session only. For more information, see “Console
Mirroring” on page A-34.
Ÿ Start Talk Mode
In a console mirroring session, it is useful for those that are monitoring the
session to be able to communicate with each other. Selecting this menu item
activates the keyboards and displays for such communications while console
mirroring is established. This is a full duplex link, so message interference is
possible. Alternating messages between users works best.

A-10 Service Guide

Ÿ Surveillance Setup Menu
This option may be used to setup operating system surveillance.

à ð
OS Surveillance Setup Menu

1. Surveillance:
Currently Enabled

2. Surveillance Time Interval:

Currently 5

3. Surveillance Delay:
Currently 1ð

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
– Surveillance
May be set to Enabled or Disabled.
– Surveillance Time Interval:
May be set to any number from 2 to 255 minutes.
– Surveillance Delay:
May be set to any number from 0 to 255 minutes.
Refer to “Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance” on page A-31 for
more information about surveillance.
Ÿ Reset Service Processor - Allows the user to reinitialize the Service Processor.
Ÿ Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM - This is an automatic process.
An update diskette can be acquired from the RS/6000 Support page on the
Internet or from your service team. The Internet address is:
http://www.rs6ððð.ibm.com/support/micro
The update files must be downloaded to a DOS-formatted diskette. You should
format the diskette just prior to receiving the download, to be sure it is clean.
Reformatting is worth the time and effort. When this process is selected, you are
prompted to place the diskette into the drive and to indicate to the system that
the diskette in available and the automatic process starts. If the system has other
needs, you are prompted. See “Service Processor Firmware Updates” on
page A-35 for additional information and update methods.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-11

SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU

à ð
SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU

1. Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode:

Currently Disabled
2. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu
3. Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu
4. Power-On System
5. Power-Off System
6. Enable/Disable Fast System Boot:
Currently Disabled
98. Return to Previous Menu
99. Exit from Menus

1>
á ñ
Ÿ Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode
This option may be used to instruct Service Processor to immediately power-on
the server after a power failure, bypassing power-on password verification.
Unattended Start Mode can also be set via SMS Menus. It is intended to be
used on servers that require automatic power-on after a power failure.

A-12 Service Guide

Ÿ Ring Indicator Power-On Menu
Ring Indicate Power-On is an alternate method of dialing in, without establishing
a Service Processor session. If the system is powered off, Ring Indicate
Power-On is enabled, the server is powered on at the predetermined number of
rings, If the server is already on, no action is taken. In either case, the telephone
call is not answered. The caller receives no feedback that the server
powered-on. The Ring Indicator Power-On Menu and defaults are shown
below:

à ð
Ring Indicator Power-On Menu

1. Ring Indicate Power-On :

Currently Disabled
2. Number of Rings :
Currently 6

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
– Ring Indicate Power-On may be set to 'Enabled' or 'Disabled'.
– Number of Rings may be set to any number from 1 to 255.
Ÿ Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu, see “Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu”
on page A-25.
Ÿ Power-on System
Lets you power-on the system immediately. For other power-on methods see
“System Power-On Methods” on page A-28.
Ÿ Power-off System
Allows the user to power-off the server following a surveillance failure.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-13

SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU

à ð
SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU

1. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot

2. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot
3. Read Service Processor Error Logs
4. Read System POST Errors
5. Read NVRAM
6. Read Service Processor Configuration
7. View System Environmental Conditions
8. Processor configuration/deconfiguration Menu
9. Memory configuration/deconfiguration Menu
98. Return to Previous Menu
99. Exit from Menus

1>
á ñ
Ÿ Read VPD Image from Last System Boot
Displays the VPD information that was in effect after the last system boot. This
information is usually identical with the results from the menu selection "Read
VPD," but in the case of configuration updates or certain faults, this historical
comparison can be useful to System Administrators and service personnel.
Ÿ Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot
Displays the boot progress indicators (check points), up to a maximum of 100,
from the system boot prior to the one in progress now. This historical
information may be useful to help diagnose system faults.
The progress indicators are displayed in two sections. Above the dashed line
are the progress indicators (latest) from the boot that produced the current
sessions. Below the dashed line are progress indicators (oldest) from the boot
preceding the one that produced the current sessions.
The progress indication codes are listed top (latest) to bottom (oldest). The
dashed line merely represents the point where the latest boot started.
Use the posted code indicated by the <-- arrow.
Ÿ Read Service Processor Error Logs
Displays error conditions detected by the Service Processor.
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available
and are able to time stamp the errors with the local time. See A-37 for an
example of the error log.

A-14 Service Guide

Ÿ Read System POST Errors
Selecting this item lets you review the results of the POST (Power-On Self Test).
Your system unit may be able to start in the presence of POST errors if there is
sufficient working system resources. If POST errors occur during start-up, this
error log when used with the diagnostics. See page A-38 for an example of the
POST error screen.
Ÿ Read NVRAM
Displays non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) contents.
Ÿ View System Environmental Conditions
The Service Processor reads all environmental sensors and reports the results to
the user. This option is most useful when surveillance fails, as it allows the user
to determine the environmental conditions that may be related to the failure.
The following is an example of the system environmental conditions screen:

à ð
System Environmental Conditions
(System Power is currently off.)

Fan ð: A stopped fan detected

Fan 1: A stopped fan detected
Fan 2: A stopped fan detected
Fan 3: A stopped fan detected
MEM Temperature is operating within normal tolerances
I/O Temperature is operating within normal tolerances
CPU Temperature is operating within normal tolerances
5.ð Volts: A low 5.ð Voltage reading detected
3.3 Volts: A low 3.3 Voltage reading detected
5.ð Standby Volts: is operating within normal tolerance
+12.ð Volts: A low +12.ð voltage reading detected
-12.ð Volts: A high -12.ð voltage reading detected
(Press Return to Continue)
á ñ

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-15

 Ÿ Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu
This option allows the user to see and modify processor configuration.
The following is an example of the Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration
Menu:

à ð
PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION/DECONFIGURATION MENU

Processor Number

ð. Configured by system (ðx11)

2. Configured by system (ðx11)

98. Return to Previous Menu

To change the configuration, select the processor number

1>
á ñ
The user can manually configure or deconfigure any processor, regardless of
failure status, through this Service Processor menu. The configuration process
takes place during the system power-up. Therefore, the configuration displayed
in STANDBY mode reflects the configuration during the last boot. To view the
current configuration, access the Service Processor menu after the system boots
up. When the user selects a processor, its state toggles between configured and
deconfigured. Processors that are not present are not listed. A processor can
be in any of the following four states:
– Configured by System: The processor is present, and has not exceeded
the number of failure threshold. It is configured by the system and is
available.
– Deconfigured by System: The processor is present, but has exceeded the
number of failure threshold. It is deconfigured by the system and is currently
unavailable.
– Manually configured: The processor is present and available. It is
configured by the user through the Service Processor menus.
– Manually deconfigured: The processor is present, but unavailable. It has
been deconfigured by the user through the Service Processor menus.

A-16 Service Guide

Ÿ Memory Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu
This option allows the user to see and modify memory configuration.
The following is an example of the Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration
Menu:

à ð
MEMORY CONFIGURATION/DECONFIGURATION MENU

DIMMs on Memory Card #ð:

DIMMs on Memory Card #1:

1. Configured by system (ðxð)

98. Return to Previous Menu

Enter card number _AND_ DIMM number separated by a space.

1>
á ñ
The user can manually configure or deconfigure any memory DIMM, regardless
of failure status, through this Service Processor menu. The configuration
process takes place during the system power-up. Therefore, the configuration
displayed in STANDBY mode reflects the configuration during the last boot. To
view the current configuration, access the Service Processor menu after the
system boots up. When the user selects a memory DIMM, its state will toggle
between configured and deconfigured. Memory DIMMs that are not present are
not listed. A memory DIMM can be in any of the following four states:
– Configured by System: The memory DIMM is present, and has not
exceeded the number of failure threshold. It is configured by the system and
is available.
– Deconfigured by System: The memory DIMM is present, but has exceeded
the number of failure threshold. It is deconfigured by the system and is
currently unavailable.
– Manually configured: The memory DIMM is present and available. It is
configured by the user through the Service Processor menus.
– Manually deconfigured: The memory DIMM is present, but unavailable. It
has been deconfigured by the user through the Service Processor menus.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-17

LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU

à ð
LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU

1. English
2. Francais
3. Deutsch
4. Italiano
5. Espanol
6. Svenska
98. Return to Previous Menu
99. Exit from Menus

1>
á ñ
Note: Your ASCII terminal must support the ISO-8859 character set in order to
properly display languages other than English.

This menu allows selecting languages into which Service Processor and system
firmware menus and messages are displayed.

A-18 Service Guide

CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU

à ð
CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU

1. Modem Configuration Menu

2. Serial Port Selection Menu
3. Serial Port Speed Setup Menu
4. Telephone Number Setup Menu
5. Call-Out Policy Setup Menu
6. Customer Account Setup Menu
7. Call-Out Test
8. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu
98. Return to Previous Menu
99. Exit from Menus

1>
á ñ
Ÿ Modem Configuration Menu, see “Modem Configuration Menu.”
Ÿ Serial Port Selection Menu, see “Serial Port Selection Menu” on page A-20.
Ÿ Telephone Number Setup Menu, see “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on
page A-21.
Ÿ Call-Out Policy Setup Menu, see “Call-Out Policy Setup Menu” on page A-23.
Ÿ Customer Account Setup Menu, see “Customer Account Setup Menu” on
page A-24.
Ÿ Ring Indicate Power-On Menu, see on page A-13.

Modem Configuration Menu

The first two lines of the Modem Configuration Menu are status lines showing the
current selections. Selections are made in the two section labeled Modem Ports and
Modem Configuration File Name. Select the serial port that you want to activate and
then select the modem configuration file for the modem on the port. If you wish to set
up both serial ports with modems, make your selections one port at a time.

For information on choosing a modem configuration file, see “Sample Modem

Configuration Files” on page A-42 and “Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session” on
page A-47.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-19

à ð
Modem Configuration Menu

Port 1 Modem Configuration File Name:

Port 2 Modem Configuration File Name:

To make changes, First select the port and then the configuration file
name

Modem Ports:
1. Serial port 1
2. Serial port 2

Modem Configuration File Name:

3. modem_f_sp
4. modem_fð_sp
5. modem_f1_sp
6. modem_z_sp
7. modem_zð_sp
8. none

9. Save configuration to NVRAM and Configure modem

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
Serial Port Selection Menu

à ð
Serial Port Selection Menu

1. Serial Port 1 Call-Out:

Currently Disabled

2. Serial Port 2 Call-Out:

Currently Disabled

3. Serial Port 1 Call-In:

Currently Disabled

4. Serial Port 2 Call-In:

Currently Disabled

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
You may enable and/or disable the call-in and call-out functions of each serial port in
any combination.

A-20 Service Guide

Serial Port Speed Setup Menu

à ð
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu

1. Serial Port 1 Speed:

Currently 96ðð

2. Serial Port 2 Speed:

Currently 96ðð

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
Serial port speed can be set for terminal performance or to accommodate modem
capabilities. A speed of 9600 baud or higher is recommended. Valid serial port
speeds are shown below:

50 600 4800
75 1200 7200
110 1800 9600
134 2000 19200
150 2400 38000
300 3600 57600
115200

Telephone Number Setup Menu

This menu may be used to set or change the telephone numbers for reporting a
system failure. The Service Processor allows setting or changing telephone numbers
for:
Ÿ Service Center Telephone Number - The telephone number of the maintenance
provider's computer.
Ÿ Customer Administration Center Telephone Number - The telephone number of
the local system support provider's computer.
Ÿ Digital Pager Telephone Number - The number for a pager carried by someone
who will respond to problem calls from your server.
Ÿ Customer Voice Telephone Number - The telephone number service personnel
will use to reach the system user.
Ÿ Customer System Telephone Number - The telephone number to which the
server's modem is connected.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-21

à ð
Telephone Number Setup Menu

1. Service Center Telephone Number:

Currently Unassigned
2. Customer Administration Center Telephone Number:
Currently Unassigned
3. Digital Pager Telephone Number:
Currently Unassigned
4. Customer Voice Telephone Number:
Currently Unassigned
5. Customer System Telephone Number:
Currently Unassigned
98. Return to Previous Menu

1>
á ñ
Ÿ Service Center Telephone Number is the number of the service center
computer. The service center usually includes a computer that takes calls from
servers with call-out capability. This computer is referred to as "the catcher."
The catcher expects messages in a specific format to which Service Processor
conforms. For more information about the format and catcher computers, refer
to the README file in the AIX /usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact your
service provider for the correct telephone number to enter here. Until you have
that number, leave this field blank.
Ÿ Customer Administration Center Telephone Number is the number of the
System Administration Center computer (catcher) that receives problem calls
from servers. Contact your system administrator for the correct telephone
number to enter here. Until you have that number, leave this field blank.
Ÿ Digital Pager Telephone Number is the number for a pager carried by
someone who responds to problem calls from your server. Contact your
administration center representative for the correct telephone number to enter
here. For test purposes, enter your telephone number here. You can change it
later when testing is complete.
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging
function. Although they can be used for paging, they return an error
message when they do not get the expected response from another
modem. Therefore, even though the paging was successful, the error
message causes the Service Processor to retry, continuing to place
pager calls for the number of retries specified in the Call-Out policy Setup
Menu. These retries result in redundant pages.

A-22 Service Guide

 For digital pagers that require a personal Identification Number (PIN) for access,
include the PIN in this field as in the following example:
1 8ðð 123 4567,,,,87654
where the commas create pauses1 for the voice response system, and the
87654 represents the PIN.
Ÿ Customer Voice Telephone Number is the telephone number of a phone near
the server or answered by someone responsible for the server. This is the
telephone number left on the pager for callback. For test purposes, enter your
telephone number here. You can change it after testing is completed.
Customer System Telephone Number is the telephone number to which your
server's modem is connected. The service or administration center
representatives need this number to make direct contact with your server for
problem investigation. This is also referred to as the call-in phone number.

Call-Out Policy Setup Menu

à ð
CALL-OUT POLICY SETUP MENU

1. Call-Out policy (First/All):

Currently First
2. Remote timeout, (in seconds):
Currently 12ð
3. Remote latency, (in seconds):
Currently 2
4. Number of retries:
Currently 2
98. Return to Previous Menu

1>
á ñ
Ÿ Call Out policy may be set to 'first' or 'all'. If call out policy is set to 'first', the
Service Processor stops at the first successful call out to one of the following
numbers in the order listed:
1. Service Center
2. Customer Admin Center
3. Pager

1 The length of these pauses is set in modem register S8. The default is usually 1 or 2 seconds each.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-23

 If call out policy is set to 'all', the Service Processor attempts a call out to all the
following numbers in the order listed:
1. Service Center
2. Customer Admin Center
3. Pager
Remote timeout and Remote latency are functions of your service provider's
catcher computer. You should take the defaults or contact your service provider
for recommended settings.
Number of retries is the number of times you want the server to retry calls that
resulted in busy signals or other error messages.

Customer Account Setup Menu

à ð
Customer Account Setup Menu

1. Customer Account Number:

Currently Unassigned
2. Customer RETAIN Login UserID:
Currently Unassigned
3. Customer RETAIN Login Password:
Currently Unassigned
98. Return to Previous Menu

1>
á ñ
Ÿ Customer Account Number is assigned by your service provider for record
keeping and billing. If you have an account number, enter it here. Otherwise,
leave this field blank.
Ÿ Customer RETAIN Login UserID and Customer RETAIN Login Password
apply to a service function to which your service provider may or may not have
access. Leave these fields blank if your service provider does not use RETAIN.

A-24 Service Guide

Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu

Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up from scratch, for example,
from a system reset or power on. The boot process ends when control passes to the
operating system process.

Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.

à ð
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu

1. Number of reboot attempts:

Currently 3
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy?
Currently Yes
3. Enable supplemental restart policy?
Currently No
4. Call-Out before restart:
Currently Disabled
98. Return to Previous Menu

1>
á ñ
Ÿ Number of reboot attempts if the server fails to successfully complete the boot
process, it attempts to reboot the number of times specified. Entry values equal
to or greater than 0 are valid. Only successive failed reboots attempts count, not
reboots that occur after a restart attempt. At restart, the counter is set to 0.
Ÿ Use OS-Defined restart policy lets the Service Processor react or not react the
same as the operating system to major system faults, by reading the setting of
the operating system parameter Automatically Restart/Reboot After a System
Crash. This parameter may, or may not be defined depending on the operating
system or its version/level. If the operating system automatic restart setting is
defined, then it may be set to respond to a major fault by restarting or by not
restarting. See your operating system documentation for details on setting up
operating systems automatic restarts. The default value is YES.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-25

 Ÿ Enable supplemental restart policy - The default setting is NO. If set to YES,
the Service Processor restarts the system when the system loses control as
detected by the Service Processor surveillance, and either:
1. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to NO
OR
2. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to YES and the operating system
has NO automatic restart policy.
Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page A-29.
Ÿ Call-Out before restart (Enabled/Disabled) If a restart is necessary due to a
system fault, you can enable the Service Processor to call out and report the
event. This item is valuable if the number of these events becomes excessive,
signalling a bigger problem.

Service Processor Functions and Features

The following section discusses some of the Service Processor functions and
features more fully.

The 7043 Model 260 supports the following functions:

Built-in Functions Initialization and Test Service Processor Basic

Instructions Test (BIST)
JTAG System Chip
Initialization
Error Data Collection BIST/POST errors and status
Checkstop FIR data logout
Machine check logout
Configuration CPU Complex validation
VPD Collection
System Management Reset and Reboot on System
Firmware fail
Reboot on system failure

A-26 Service Guide

Local User Function User Interface Local async console
Text based menus with NLS
Operator Panel messages
Power and Miscellaneous Power On/Off
Configurable Reboot Policy
Status and Data Access VPD
Error data (Service Processor)
Error data (system)
Environmental data
Service Processor Setup Passwords
Utilities
Phone numbers
Language (NLS) selection
Call In/Call Out enable/disable
Flash (Gold/Recovery block)
Update
Flash (Composite block)
Update
System Name
Modem Configuration
Remote User Functions Call Out (Call Home) Boot failure
Reporting
OS Termination
Surveillance failure
Critical EPOW reporting
Checkstop
Machine check
Identify system by name Call In
Power-on via ring-indicate
Password/security check
Console mirroring/Quick
disconnect
Application Interface Functions Monitor/Sense Thermal/Voltage/fan speed
Service Processor Flash
Update(Recovery and
Composite)

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-27

System Power-On Methods
Ÿ Power-on Switch - see “Operator Panel” on page 1-8.
Ÿ Service Processor Menu power-on request
You can request a power-on via the Service Processor menus from either a local
or remote terminal.
If a remote terminal is to be used, the modem must be connected to serial port
1, and the operating system set up to enable a TTY login session on that port.
Refer to “Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session” on page A-47 for information
on transferring modem sessions from Service Processor to the operating system.
Ÿ Unattended start mode - refer to Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode on
page A-12.
The Service Processor can be enabled to recover from the loss of AC power
(see Enable/Disable Unattended Power-On Mode in the SYSTEM POWER
CONTROL MENU). When AC power is restored, the system returns to the then
current power state at the time AC loss occurred. For example, if the system
was powered-on when AC loss occurred, it reboots/restarts when power is
restored. If the system was powered-off when AC loss occurred, it remains off
when power is restored.
Ÿ Timed power-on - refer to the shutdown -t command on servers using AIX.
Working in conjunction with AIX, the Service Processor in your server can
operate a timer, much like the wake-up timer on your clock radio. You can set
the timer so that your server powers on at a certain time after shutting down.
The timer is battery operated, so power interruptions occurring while the server is
off do not affect its accuracy. Refer to the shutdown -t command of AIX for
details on setting the timer.
Because of the potential for AC power loss, the Timed Power-On function of AIX
can only be assured when Unattended Power-On Mode is enabled. If a Timed
Power-On event occurs during an AC power loss, and if Unattended Power-On
Mode is enabled, the system starts when AC power is restored.
If Unattended Start Mode is disabled (the default), the system power state
remains off when AC power is restored, regardless of the power state of the
system when AC loss occurred.
Ÿ Ring Indicate Power-On
Enabling ring indicate power-on disables remote call-in. If ring indicate power-on
is enabled, the server powers on at a predetermined number of rings. If the
server is already on, no action is taken. In either case, the telephone call is not
answered. The caller receives no feedback that the server powered on.

A-28 Service Guide

 Ÿ Follow-up to a Failed Boot Attempt
The Service Processor initiates a power-on sequence upon detection of a failed
boot attempt.

Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery

Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up from scratch, for example,
from a system reset or power on. The boot process ends when control passes to the
operating system process.

Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.

Failure During Boot Process: During the boot process, either initially after
system power-on or upon reboot after a system failure, the Service Processor
monitors the boot progress (via surveillance). If progress stops, the Service
Processor can reinitiate the boot process (reboot) if enabled to do so. The Service
Processor can re-attempt this process according to an entry on the Reboot/Restart
Policy Setup Menu.

Failure During Normal System Operation: When the boot process completes
and control transferers to the operating system (OS), the Service Processor can
monitor operating system activity (see the SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU
item Set Surveillance Parameters). If OS activity stops, the Service Processor can
initiate a reboot/restart process based on the settings in the Service Processor
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu and the OS automatic restart settings (see OS
documentation).

If the operating system is AIX, the menu item under SMIT for setting the restart
policy is Automatically Reboot After Crash (True/False), and the default is False.
When the setting is True, and if the Service Processor parameter, Use OS-Defined
Restart Policy, is Yes (the default), the Service Processor takes over for AIX to
reboot/restart after a Check Stop or Surveillance failure.

Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls: The operating system's

automatic restart policy (see operating system documentation) indicates the OS
response to a system crash. The Service Processor can be instructed to refer to
that policy, or not, by the Use OS-Defined Restart Policy menu item.

If the operating system has no automatic restart policy, or if it is disabled, then the
Service Processor restart policy can be controlled from the Service Processor Menus
by using the Enable Supplemental Restart Policy selection.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-29

Use OS-Defined restart policy?: The Use OS-Defined restart policy default
setting is YES. This causes theService Processor to refer to the OS Automatic
Restart Policy setting and take action, the same action the OS would take if it could
have responded to the problem causing the restart.

When this setting is NO, or if the OS did not set a policy, the Service Processor
refers to Enable supplemental restart policy for its action.

Enable Supplemental Restart Policy?: The default setting is NO. If set to

YES, the Service Processor restarts the system when the system loses control as
detected by the Service Processor surveillance, and either:
1. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to NO
OR
2. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to YES and the operating system has
NO automatic restart policy.
Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page A-29.

The following provides a more thorough understanding of the relations among the
OS and Service Processor restart controls:

OS Automatic Service Processor Service Processor System response

reboot/restart to use OS-Defined Enable
after crash setting restart policy? supplemental
restart policy?
None No No±
None No Yes Restarts
None Yes± No±
None Yes± Yes Restarts
False² No No±
False² No Yes Restarts
False² Yes± No±
False² Yes± Yes
True No No±
True No Yes Restarts
True Yes± No± Restarts
True Yes± Yes Restarts

1 Service Processor default

2 AIX default
A-30 Service Guide
Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance

Surveillance is a function in which the Service Processor monitors the system, and
the system monitors the Service Processor. This monitoring is accomplished by
periodic samplings called heartbeats.

Surveillance is available during two phases:

1. System firmware bringup (automatic) and
2. Operating system runtime (optional).

System Firmware Surveillance: Provides the Service Processor with a means

to detect boot failures while the system firmware is running.

System firmware surveillance is automatically enabled during system power-on. It

cannot be disabled via a user selectable option.

If the Service Processor detects no heartbeats during system boot (for 7 minutes), it
cycles the system power to attempt a reboot. The maximum number of retries is set
from the Service Processor menus. If the fail condition repeats, the Service
Processor leaves the machine powered on, logs an error and offers menus to the
user. If Call-out is enabled, the Service Processor calls to report the failure and
displays the operating system surveillance failure code on the operator panel.

Operating System Surveillance: Provides the Service Processor with a means

to detect hang conditions, hardware or software failures while the operating system is
running. It also provides the operating system with a means to detect the Service
Processor failure by the lack of a return heartbeat.

Operating system surveillance is enabled by default. This is to allow the user to run
operating systems that do not support this Service Processor option.

Operating system surveillance can be enabled and disabled via:

Ÿ Service Processor Menus
Ÿ Service Processor Service Aids

Three parameters must be set for operating system surveillance:

1. Surveillance enable/disable
2. Surveillance interval
This is the maximum time in minutes the Service Processor should wait for a
heartbeat from the operating system before timeout.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-31

 3. Surveillance delay
This is the length of time in minutes for the Service Processor to wait from when
the operating system is started to when the first heartbeat is expected.

Surveillance takes effect immediately after setting the parameters from the Service
Processor menus.

If operating system surveillance is enabled (and system firmware has passed control
to the operating system), and the Service Processor does not detect any heartbeats
from the operating system, the Service Processor assumes the system is hung. The
machine is left powered on and the Service Processor enters standby phase,
displaying the operating system surveillance failure code on the operator panel. If
Call-out is enabled, the Service Processor calls to report the failure.

A-32 Service Guide

Call Out (Call-Home)

The Service Processor can call out (Call-Home) when it detects one of the following
conditions:
Ÿ System firmware surveillance failure.
Ÿ Operating system surveillance failure (if supported by Operating System).
Ÿ Critical environmental failures.
Ÿ Restarts

To enable the call out feature, you need to do the following:

Ÿ Have a modem connected to serial port 1 or 2.
Ÿ Set up the following using the Service Processor Menus or Diagnostic Service
Aids:
– Enable call out for the serial port where the modem is connected.
– Set up serial port line speed.
– Enter the modem configuration filename.
– Set up site specific parameters (i.e. phone numbers for call out,
call out policy, etc).
Ÿ To call out before restart, set “Call-Out before restart” to ENABLED from the
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup menu.
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging
function. Although they can be used for paging, they return an error
message when they do not get the expected response from another modem.
Therefore, even though the paging was successful, the error message
causes the Service Processor to retry, continuing to place pager calls for the
number of retries specified in the Call-Out policy Setup Menu. These retries
result in redundant pages.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-33

Console Mirroring

Console mirroring allows a person on a local ASCII terminal to monitor the Service
Processor activities of a remote user. Console mirroring ends when the Service
Processor releases control of the serial ports to the system firmware.

System Configuration:
Ÿ Service Processor
Ÿ Modem connected to one serial port and enabled for incoming calls
Ÿ Local ASCII terminal connected to the other serial port. This local terminal may
be connected directly to your server or connected through another modem.

There are two scenarios in which console mirroring can be invoked:

1. Remote session first, then local session added
a. Remote session already in progress.
b. Remote user uses the Service Processor menus to enable console mirroring,
allowing both consoles to be active.
2. Local session first, then remote session added
a. Local session is already in progress.
b. The Service Processor receives a call from the remote user.
c. The local user selects the option to enable console mirroring. The Service
Processor immediately begins mirroring Service Processor menus.
Note: A quick disconnect is accomplished by hitting the key sequence Ctrl+D on
either console. Both sessions exit the Service Processor menus.

A-34 Service Guide

Service Processor Firmware Updates

The Service Processor EPROM may need to be updated for two different reasons:
1. The UPDATE (composite) portion of the EPROM has become corrupted.
2. The Service Processor firmware upgrades, without any corruption present.

The use of a Flash EPROM allows updates to occur without physically replacing the
memory.

The firmware in your server can be updated using one of four available initiation
processes:
1. Service Processor initiation
2. SMS Utilities initiation
3. Service Aids initiation
4. AIX initiation.
Each initiation method is described below. In each case, the process prompts you
for your authority and shows the contents of the update media. Verify the file with
which to perform the update, and follow any other instructions that may appear.
After initiation, the processes are identical and automatic.

There are two areas in each firmware module that may need updating:
1. The gold code or base code or EPROM area.
2. The custom or main program or FLASH area.

Each update file contains matching gold and custom firmware, so it is not possible to
update to a conflicting set.

Before the update process begins, the versions of each of the two areas of the target
firmware module are compared to the versions on the update diskette. Only the
area(s) that need updating are updated. In most cases, only the custom area is
updated.

An update diskette can be acquired from the RS/6000 Support page on the Internet
or from your service team. The Internet address is:
http://www.rs6ððð.ibm.com/support/micro

The update files must be downloaded to a DOS-formatted diskette. You should

format the diskette just prior to receiving the download, to be sure it is clean.
Reformatting is worth the time and effort.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-35

Refer to the downloaded update instructions, or to the System Management Services
“Config” on page 6-4 or “Display Configuration” on page 6-25 or Service Processor
menus on page A-7, to determine the level of the system unit or service processor
flash.

Updating Firmware from the Service Processor Menus: The Service Processor Menus
are available while the server is powered off. From the Service Processor Main
Menu, select Service Processor Setup to bring up a menu containing the item,
Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM. Selecting that item starts the update
process. The process requests the update diskette(s) as needed. After inserting the
first diskette and informing the system, the process continues automatically. If the
process requires user assistance, it is requested.

Updating Firmware from the SMS Utilities: From a powered down or reset condition,
bring up the SMS Utilities and select the menu item for updating firmware. The
process requests the update diskette(s) as needed. After inserting the first diskette
and informing the system, the process continues automatically. If the process
requires user assistance, it is requested.

Updating Firmware from the Service Aids

Note: This service aid is only supported for Online Diagnostics.: This service aid
allows you to update the system or service processor flash.

Additional update and recovery instructions may be provided; also you need to know
the fully qualified path and file name of the flash update image file. If the flash
update image file is on a diskette, you need the AIX DOS utilities package to process
the diskette. You can use the dosdir command to find out the name of the update
image file. This service aid uses the dosread command to put the file into the /var
file system.

Using this service aid to update the system or service processor flash does not save
the current contents of the flash.

The flash image file will be copied in the /var file system. If there is not enough
space in the /var file system for the flash update image file, an error is reported. If
this occurs, exit the service aid, increase the size of the /var file system and retry the
service aid. After the file is copied, a warning screen asks for confirmation to
continue the flash update. Continuing the flash update eventually causes the system
to reboot and return to the AIX login prompt. After the system unit reboots, the file
/var/update_flash_image can be removed to conserve space in the /var file system.

A-36 Service Guide

Updating Firmware from AIX

You must delete the file /var/update_flash_image before proceeding.

The flash update image file must have already been placed in the /var file system.
This could have been done with a file transfer from another server or with the
dosread command of the AIX DOS Utilities, for example. With the flash update
image in place, issuing the following AIX command
shutdown -u /var/\filename\.img
initiates the update process. Where *filename* is the name of the flash update
image. During the process, the server powers down and reboots. You know the
process is complete when the login prompt reappears.

Service Processor Logs

Service Processor Error Log: The Service Processor error logs contain error
conditions detected by the Service Processor.

à ð
Error Log

1997ð626223337 ð. Loss of Redundant Fan #5

4ð21ðð91

Press "C" to clear error log, any other key to continue. >
á ñ
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available and
are able to time stamp with local time.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-37

System POST Errors: If POST (Power-On Self Test) errors occur during
start-up, this error log help isolate faults when used with the diagnostics.

à ð
Read System POST Errors

Version : ð
Severity : ð
Disposition : ð
Initiator : ð
Event being reported : ð
Extended Error Log Data:
ðxC2 ðxðð ðx84 ðxð9 ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð
ðx2ð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðx72 ðx74
ðx63 ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð
ðxðð ðxðð ðx28 ðxð3 ðxðð ðxð5 ðxðð ðxð1
ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð
ðx49 ðx42 ðx4D ðxðð ðx55 ðx3ð ðx2E ðx31
ðx2D ðx5ð ðx31 ðx2D ðx58 ðx31 ðxðð

(Press Return to Continue)

á ñ

A-38 Service Guide

Service Processor Operational Phases

This section provides a high-level flow of the phases of the Service Processor (SP).
SP Power Applied

Pre-Standby Phase

Standby Phase SP Menus Available

Bring-Up Phase SMS Menus Available

Runtime Phase SMS Menus Available

Pre-Standby Phase: This phase is entered when the server is connected to a

power source. The server may or may not be fully powered on. This phase is exited
when the Power-On Self Tests (POSTS) and configurations tasks are completed.

The Pre-Standby phase components are:

Ÿ SP Initialization
SP performs any necessary hardware and software initializations.
Ÿ SP POST
SP conducts Power-On Self Tests on its various work and code areas.
Ÿ SP Unattended Start Mode Checks
To assist fault recovery. If unattended start mode is set, the SP automatically
reboots the server. SP does not wait for a user-input or power-on command, but
moves straight through the phase and into the Bringup Phase. The unattended
start mode can be reset by accessing SMS menus, or SP menus.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-39

Standby Phase: The standby phase can be reached in two ways:
1. With the server OFF and power connected (the normal path), recognized by OK in
the LCD display.
2. With the server ON after an operating system fault, recognized by STBY or an
8-digit code in the LCD display.

In the Standby phase, the SP takes care of some automatic duties and is available
for menus operation. The SP remains in the standby phase until a power-on request
is detected.

The Standby phase components are:

Ÿ Modem Configuration
SP will configure the modem (if installed) so that incoming calls may be received,
or outgoing calls may be placed.
Ÿ Dial In
Monitor incoming phone line to answer calls, prompt for a password, verify the
password and remotely display the standby menu. The remote session can be
mirrored on the local ASCII console if the server is so equipped and the user
enables this function.
Ÿ Menus
The SP menus are password protected. Before you can access them you need
to know either General User (Power-On Password or POP) or Privileged User
(Privileged Access Password or PAP).

Bring-Up Phase: This phase is entered upon power-on, and exited upon loading
of the operating system.

The Bring-up phase components are:

Ÿ Retry Request Check
The SP checks to see if the previous boot attempt failed. If two consecutive fails
are detected, the SP displays an error code and places an outgoing call to notify
an external party if the user has enabled this option.
Ÿ Dial Out
The SP can dial a pre-programmed telephone number in the event of an IPL
failure. The SP issues an error report with the last reported IPL status indicated
and any other available error information.

A-40 Service Guide

 Ÿ Update Operator Panel
The SP displays Operator Panel data on the ASCII terminal if a remote
connection is active.
Ÿ Environmental Monitoring
Environmental Monitoring is now controlled by the Service Processor instead of
the base system, with expanded error recording and reporting.
Ÿ System Firmware Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)
The SP monitors and time the interval between system firmware heartbeats.
Ÿ Responding to System Processor Commands
The SP responds to any command issued by the system processor.

Runtime Phase: This phase includes the tasks that the SP performs during
steady-state execution of the operating system.
Ÿ Environmental Monitoring
The SP monitors voltages, temperatures and fan speeds (on some servers).
Ÿ Responding to System Processor Commands
The SP responds to any command issued by the system processor.
Ÿ Run-Time Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)
If the device driver is installed and surveillance enabled, the SP monitors the
system heartbeat. If the heartbeat times out, the SP places an outgoing call.
This is different from the Bringup Phase scenario where two reboot attempts are
made before placing an outgoing call.

Service Processor Procedures in Service Mode

When the system is in service mode, the following service processor parameters are
suspended.
Ÿ Unattended Start Mode
Ÿ Reboot/Restart Policy
Ÿ Call-Out
Ÿ Surveillance

When service mode is exited, the service processor parameters revert back to the
customer settings.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-41

Modem Configurations

Sample Modem Configuration Files

With nearly 1000 modems to choose from, and various programming standards,
configuring a modem for use with the Service Processor can be challenging. The
Service Processor is designed to place little demand on an attached modem, thereby
increasing the setup and connection success rates. Several sample modem
configurations files are supplied that either work directly with your modem, or provide
a good starting point for a custom setup, if required. These files are included on the
Sample Modem Configuration Files diskette and in your Service Processor firmware
with the following names:

Diskette File Name Service Processor Firmware File Name

modem_z.cfg modem_z.sp
modem_z0.cfg modem_z0.sp
modem_f.cfg modem_f.sp
modem_f0.cfg modem_f0.sp
modem_f1.cfg modem_f1.sp

The sample modem configuration files can be found in the /usr/share/modems

subdirectory, if your server is using AIX. A listing of each file is included at the end
of this appendix.

With the following selection procedures and your modem manual, one of these
configuration files should be suitable for your use.

A-42 Service Guide

Configuration File Selection
1. Does your modem respond to the extended command set (prefixed with &)?
If yes, go to 3
If not, continue with 2 below.
2. Does your modem respond to:
a. ATZ reset command, or
b. ATZn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, etc.?
If ATZ, configuration file modem_z.cfg is recommended.
If ATZn, configuration file modem_z0.cfg is recommended.
If yes, go to 5 on page A-44
If not, continue with 3 below.
3. Does your modem command set include a test for v.42 error correction at the
remote modem (often called "Auto-Reliable Mode")?
If yes, and enabled is the default, this test must be disabled. See “Customizing
the Modem Configuration Files” on page A-44 for more information.
If not, continue with Step 4 on page A-44.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-43

 4. Does your modem respond to:
a. AT&F reset command, or
b. AT&Fn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, etc.?
If AT&F, configuration file modem_f.cfg is recommended.
If AT&Fn, configuration file modem_f0.cfg or modem_f1.cfg is recommended,
depending on which provides the hardware flow control profile.
5. Selection is complete. If you find it necessary to adjust any of these
configuration files, do so with reference to the manual that came with your
modem.2 Choose settings that enable hardware flow control and respond to DTR.

Examples

Modem Setup Z Setup Z0 Setup F Setup F0 Setup F1

(Rare)
*
AT&T DataPort 2001 X
Bocamodem 1440E X
Hayes Smart Modem 300 X
IBM 5841 X
IBM 5843 X
IBM 7851 X
IBM 7852-010 X
IBM 7855 X
USRobotics X
33.6K Sportster
Zoom V.32 X

*
Ring interrupt only on first ring.

Customizing the Modem Configuration Files: You can create your own
modem configuration file(s) or modify the samples provided. After you customize
your modem configuration files, you MUST access them via the Configure Remote
Maintenance Policy Service Aid rather than from the Service Processor menus.

2 Some older modems do not respond to the commands Xð or &R1. You should edit out these
commands from the modem configuration file if yours is such a modem. See your modem manual for
more information.

A-44 Service Guide

Note: If you have already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations and
telephone numbers from the Service Processor menus, specify your customized
modem configuration files from the service aid.

If you have not already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations and
telephone numbers from the Service Processor menus, you may set them up with
the service aids while you specify your customized modem configuration files.

To disable Auto-Reliable Mode testing of the remote modem, use the sample modem
configuration file /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg as a model to modify.
1. Find the necessary command in your modem manual.
2. Copy /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg to make a new file with the name (for
example) modem_fx.cfg.
3. In modem_fx.cfg, change the line Send "ATEðT\r" to Send "ATcccEðT\r" where
ccc is the added command found in your modem manual.
Make this change to the third line of each of the following stanzas:
Ÿ condout
Ÿ condin
Ÿ ripo
4. Save the changes.

Use this new modem configuration file as described at the top of this section.

Xon/Xoff Modems: Some modems of the mid-80's vintage assume software flow
control (Xon/Xoff) between the computer and the modem. Modems with this design
send extra characters during and after the transmitted data. The Service Processor
cannot tolerate these extra characters. If your configuration includes such a modem,
your functional results may be unpredictable.

The sample modem configuration files included in this package do not support these
modems, so custom configuration files would be necessary. Anchor Automation
2400E is an example of such a modem.

Most newer modems do not use this design. It is recommended you use modems of
newer vintage if you experience unexplainable performance problems that may be
due to Xon/Xoff characters.

Ring Detection: Most modems produce an interrupt request each time they
detect a ring signal. Some modems generate an interrupt only on the first ring signal
they receive. AT&T DataPort 2001 is an example of such a modem.

The Service Processor uses the ring interrupt request to count the number of rings
when Ring Indicate Power-On (RIPO) is enabled. If your modem produces an

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-45

interrupt on only the first ring, set Ring Indicate Power-On to start on the first ring.
Otherwise, you may choose to start Ring Indicate Power-On on any ring count that
makes your operation convenient.

Terminal Emulators: The Service Processor is compatible with simple ASCII

terminals, and therefore compatible with most emulators. It is for the cases when a
remote session is handed off from the Service Processor to the operating system
that agreeing terminal emulators becomes important.

The server's operating system has some built-in terminal emulators. You may also
have a commercially available terminal emulation. It is important that the local and
host computers select the same or compatible terminal emulators so the key
assignments and responses match. This assures successful communications and
control.

For best formatting, choose line wrap in your terminal emulator setup.

Recovery Procedures: Line noises, power surges, etc., can sometimes cause
your modem to enter an undefined state. When it is being used for dial in, dial out
or Ring Indicate Power-On, your modem is initialized each time one of these actions
is expected. If one of these environmental conditions occur after your modem has
been initialized, it may be necessary to recover your modem to a known state.

A-46 Service Guide

If your modem communicates properly with remote users, it is probably in control. It
may be wise to occasionally change some of the functional settings and then change
them back, just for the sense of security that the modem is communicating, and to
assure it has been initialized recently.

Another strategy, particularly if your system is difficult to access physically, is to

protect it with an Uninterruptable Power Source (UPS) and a phone-line surge
protector.

In case recovery becomes necessary, your system should be shut down as

gracefully as possible. Disconnect the power cable and press the power button to
drain capacitance while power is disconnected. Disconnect and reconnect modem
power, then reconnect system power to allow complete reinitialization of your system.

Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session

There are about as many modem command variations as there are modems. The
sample modem configuration files have been written to capture the largest number of
workable modem settings.

The modem command &Dn (where 'n' is a number) generally sets the modem
response to the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal from the server's serial port. The
desired response is that the modem will hold a connection while DTR is enabled,
and drop the connection when DTR is released. This is the mechanism by which the
server "hangs up" on a connection under normal conditions.

Usually the command &D2 works, but not always. The sample modem configuration
files3 take this high percentage position. You should consult your modem's manual
for its specific response scheme for the &Dn command.

There are two methods for dealing with the modem's response to DTR:
1. Recovery
2. Prevention

Before proceeding with one of these strategies, you need to determine if your
server's modem is set up properly to respond to DTR.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-47

With the remote terminal connected to serial port 1 and defined as the primary
console device, there are two tests you can perform:
1. Does the modem drop the connection after the "System initialization complete"
message appears at the remote terminal?
If yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.
If no, try another &Dn setting for your server's modem. See your modem manual
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of
the sample modem configuration files3.
2. Does the server's modem disconnect when the power drops? You can make
this observation at the remote terminal by commanding your server to shutdown
and power off. (The AIX command shutdown -F does this.) Watch for the
message NO CARRIER on your remote terminal.
If yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.
If no, try another &Dn setting for your server's modem. See your model manual
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of
the sample modem configuration files3.

Recovery Strategy: The recovery strategy consists of making two calls to

establish a remote session. This is the easiest solution to implement, and allows
more freedom for configuring your server's serial ports.

To set up a remote terminal session, dial into the Service Processor and start the
system. After the operating system is loaded and initialized, the connection will be
dropped. At this point, you call the server back and the operating system answers
and offer you the login prompt.

3 Only the following sample modem configuration files contain the &Dn command (in three places each):
Ÿ modem_f.cfg
Ÿ modem_f0.cfg
Ÿ modem_f1.cfg
If you are using modem_z.cfg or modem_z0.cfg, you cannot control DTR response. If your remote
terminal does not disconnect after logging off, you must command the remote terminal emulator to hang
up. This then breaks the connection.

A-48 Service Guide

Prevention Strategy: The disconnect is caused by the operating system when it
initializes the primary console. The tests listed above are conducted with the
remote terminal selected as the primary console to manifest the modem's response
to DTR transitions.

If a local ASCII terminal or a graphics console is to be a permanent part of your

server, then make one of them the primary console. Your remote terminal no longer
experiences the connection loss.

If a local console is not a permanent part of your server, you can still assign either
the unused graphics console or the unused serial port as the primary console. This
gives you the desired seamless connection at your remote terminal.

If you choose to use the unused serial port as the primary console, some
initialization traffic is sent to any serial device attached to that port. As a result, that
serial device's connection and function could be affected. These impacts may make
that port unattractive for devices other than a temporary local ASCII terminal.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-49

Modem Configuration Samples

Sample File modem_z.cfg

#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many early Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the ATZ reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This setup will work for many modems, but it is required for early vintage
# modems which respond to neither the ATZð reset command nor the extended (&)
# commands. Refer to your modem manual.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# Z Reset to factory defaults Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "ATZQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

A-50 Service Guide

 # Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "ATZQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "ATZQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-51

Sample File modem_z0.cfg
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Zð
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for some early Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the ATZð reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This setup is recommended for modems that will respond to the ATZð command
# and which do not respond to the extended (&) commands. Refer to your modem
# manual.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# Zð Reset. Restore Profile ð Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up Xð=ð Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "ATZðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

A-52 Service Guide

 expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "ATZðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "ATZðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-53

Sample File modem_f.cfg
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&F reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early
# vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is recommended. If your modem responds to
# the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), setup file
# Fð or F1 is recommended.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &F Reset to default profile Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up Xð=ð Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&FQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð

A-54 Service Guide

 done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&FQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&FQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-55

 expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

A-56 Service Guide

Sample File modem_f0.cfg
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Fð
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&Fð reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early
# vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is recommended. If your modem responds to
# the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), but doesn't
# work properly with this setup file, setup F1 is recommended.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &Fð Reset. Restore profile ð Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up Xð=ð Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&FðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-57

 expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&FðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&FðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.

A-58 Service Guide

 done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem

# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-59

Sample File modem_f1.cfg
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F1
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&F1 reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is for modems with extended (&) commands and which do not work
# properly with setup Fð. For early vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is
# recommended.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &F1 Reset. Restore profile 1 Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up Xð=ð Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&F1QðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.

# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"

A-60 Service Guide

 timeout 6ð
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&F1QðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.

expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number

# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.

expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&F1QðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1

ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

Appendix A. Service Processor Information A-61

error: # Handle unexpected modem
# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

A-62 Service Guide

Appendix B. Interpreting Firmware Error Codes

The error code is an 8-character (4-byte) hexadecimal code produced by firmware to

identify the potential failing function or FRU in a system. It consists of 5 source code
characters and 3 reason code characters. Individual characters within the error code
have specific field definitions, as defined in the following tables. Table B-1 and
Table B-2.

Table B-1. Service Reference Code Field Layout

Source Code Reason Code
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 R1 R2 R3

Table B-2 (Page 1 of 2). Service Reference Code Field Descriptions

Field Description
Maintenance Package Source that produced the error code.
0 Reserved
1 Reserved
2 POST, Firmware
3 BIST
S1
4 Service Processor, base system controller, etc.
5 Reserved
8 Product specific service guide, MAPs
9 Reserved
A-F Reserved
S2 Base class
S3-S4 Sub-class
S5 Unique version of the device/FRU type for a particular product.
Device/FRU unique failure reason codes.
1-7 Use in combination with R2, R3 for diagnostic test failure when
maximum isolation was obtained.
8-9 Use in combination with R2, R3 for diagnostic test failure when
maximum isolation was NOT obtained.
R1 A Log analysis of POST error log
B Log analysis of machine check or checkstop error log
C Reserved
D Diagnostic detected missing resource
E-F Reserved

Appendix B. Interpreting Firmware Error Codes B-1

 Table B-2 (Page 2 of 2). Service Reference Code Field Descriptions
Field Description
R2 - R3 Device/FRU unique failure reason codes.

Table B-3 (Page 1 of 3). Current PCI 2.1 Class Code Definition
PCI Base
PCI
Class
Sub-Class Description
(lower
S3 -S4
nibble) S2
Devices that were built before the class code field was defined.
All currently implemented devices except VGA-compatible
0 00
devices.
01 VA-compatible devices
Mass storage controller
00 SCSI bus controller
01 IDE controller
1 02 Floppy disk controller
03 Intelligent Peripheral Interface (IPI) bus controller
04 Redundant Array of Independent Disk (RAID) controller
80 Other mass storage controller
Network controller
00 Ethernet controller
01 Token Ring controller
2
02 FDDI controller
03 ATM controller
80 Other network controller
Display controller
00 VGA-Compatible controller
3
01 Extended Graphics Array (XGA) controller
80 Other display controller
Multimedia device
00 Video device
4
01 Audio device
80 Other multimedia device
Memory controller
00 RAM
5
01 Flash
80 Other memory controller

B-2 Service Guide

Table B-3 (Page 2 of 3). Current PCI 2.1 Class Code Definition
Bridge devices
00 Host bridge
01 ISA bridge
02 EISA bridge
03 MCA bridge
6
04 PCI-to-PCI bridge
05 PCMCIA bridge
06 NuBus bridge
07 Cardbus bridge
80 Other bridge device
Simple communication controllers
00 Serial controllers
7
01 Parallel port
80 Other communication controllers
Generic system peripherals
00 PIC
01 DMA controller
8
02 System timer
03 Real-Time Clock (RTC) controller
80 Other system peripherals
Input devices
00 Keyboard controller
9 01 Digitizer (pen)
02 Mouse controller
80 Other input controllers
Docking stations
A 00 Generic docking station
80 Other type of docking station
Processors
00 Reserved
01 Reserved
B 02 Reserved
10 Reserved
20 PowerPC
40 Co-processor

Appendix B. Interpreting Firmware Error Codes B-3

 Table B-3 (Page 3 of 3). Current PCI 2.1 Class Code Definition
Serial bus controllers
00 FireWire (IEEE 1394)
01 ACCESS.bus
C
02 Serial Storage Architecture (SSA)
03 Universal Serial Bus (USB)
04 Fibre channel

Table B-4 (Page 1 of 2). S2-S3-S4 Definition for devices/FRUs not defined in the PCI specification
Base Class S2 Sub-Class S3 - Description
S4
0 10 AC Power
11 DC Power
20 Temperature Related Problem
21 Fans
30-3x Cables
40-4x Terminators
50 Operator panels
60-6x Reserved
70-7x Reserved
90-9x Reserved
A0 ROS Heartbeat
B0 O/S Heartbeat
D0 Unknown device
E0 Security

B-4 Service Guide

Table B-4 (Page 2 of 2). S2-S3-S4 Definition for devices/FRUs not defined in the PCI specification
Base Class S2 Sub-Class S3 - Description
S4
1 A0 SCSI Drivers (generic)
B0 IDE Drives
C0 RAID Drives
D0 SSA Drives
E0 Tapes SCSI
E1 Tapes IDE
ED SCSI changer
EE Other SCSI device
EF Diskette drive
F0 CDROM SCSI
F1 CDROM IDE
F2 Read/Write optical SCSI
F3 Read/Write optical IDE
F4 - FF TBD media devices
5 A0 L2 Cache Controller including integrated SRAM
A1 L2 Cache SRAM
A8 NVRAM
A9 CMOS
AA Quartz/EEPROM
B0 - Bx Memory cards
Cyy Memory Dimms (Where C is S2, S3, or S4 and yy
identifies the memory size and type).
7 A0 I2C bus
8 A0 Power Management Functions
9 A0 - Ax Keyboards
B0 - Bx Mouse(s)
C0 - Cx Dials
D0 Tablet
D1 - Dx TBD input devices
B A0 Service processor

Appendix B. Interpreting Firmware Error Codes B-5

B-6 Service Guide
Index

customer administration center A-22

A
about this book xvii
account number A-24 D
adapters devices, handling static–sensitive 7-2
removal and replacement 7-20 diagnostics, online 5-1
AIX location codes 4-3, 4-6 diagnostics, standalone 5-1
dial-out telephone numbers,
setting A-21
B disk drive cage
battery
removal and replacement 7-40
disposal, recycling xv
disk drives
boot list 5-2
configuration 7-26
bus SRN to FRU Table 3-30
deconfiguration 7-26
removal and replacement 7-22
C
cables
power 1-14
E
electrical safety xi
call home, see call out
EPROM
call out (call-home) A-33
updates A-35
call-out
error code to FRU index 3-1
policy A-23
error codes
check points A-4, A-14
firmware 3-2, B-1
checkpoints 3-33
POST 3-1
firmware 3-36
service processor 3-33
component locations F
I/O board 1-4 front fan
operator panel 1-8 removal and replacement 7-39
system board 1-7
console mirroring G
enable/disable A-10 general access password,
quick disconnect A-34 changing A-10
system configuration A-34 general user menus A-4
covers graphical system management
removal and replacement 7-5 services 6-1

Index X-1
 maintenance analysis procedures
H (MAPs) (continued)
handling static–sensitive devices 7-2
problem determination MAP 2-9
heartbeat A-31
quick entry MAP 2-2
media drives
I removal and replacement 7-42
I/O board memory bits 3-29
component locations 1-4 memory card
removal and replacement 7-33 removal and replacement 7-11
index, error code to FRU 3-1 memory card locations 1-7
installation procedures memory module
removal and replacement 7-14
memory problem resolution MAP 2-15
K menus
keyboards 8-5, 8-6
general user A-4
privileged user A-6
L service processor A-3
language selection A-18 service processor call-in/call-out
laser compliance statement xiii setup A-19
laser safety information xiii service processor call-out policy
loading the system diagnostics 5-1 setup A-23
location codes 4-1, 4-6 service processor customer account
AIX 4-3 setup A-24
format 4-1 service processor language
physical 4-1 selection A-18
locations service processor reboot policy
memory 1-7 setup A-25
system unit 1-1 service processor serial port
locations, components selection A-20
I/O board 1-4 service processor serial port speed
operator panel 1-8 setup A-21
system board 1-7 service processor setup A-8
service processor system
information A-14
M service processor system power
maintenance analysis procedures
control A-12
(MAPs) 2-1
service processor telephone
memory problem resolution
setup A-21
MAP 2-15
support menus
minimum configuration Map 2-31
service processor menus A-2
power MAP 2-23
service processor service
aids A-2

X-2 Service Guide

menus (continued) power cables 1-14
support menus (continued) power MAP 2-23
SMS A-2 power supply
messages, SP checkpoints 3-33 removal and replacement 7-35
minimum configuration Map 2-31 power-on methods A-28
modem preface xvii
configuration file selection A-43 primary console A-49
configurations A-42 privileged access password,
seamless transfer A-47 changing A-10
modem_f.cfg, sample file A-54 privileged user menus A-6
modem_f0.cfg, sample file A-57 problem determination MAP 2-9
modem_f1.cfg, sample file A-60 processor and memory card cover
modem_z.cfg, sample file A-50 removal and replacement 7-10
modem_z0.cfg, sample file A-52 processor card
removal and replacement 7-17
product disposal xv
O progress indicators A-4, A-14
online diagnostics 5-1
operational phases, SP
standby A-40 Q
operator panel quick entry MAP 2-2
component locations 1-8
removal and replacement 7-37
R
read system, POST errors A-5, A-15
P rear fan
pager A-21, A-22 removal and replacement 7-38
parts 8-5, 8-6 reboot recovery A-25, A-29
keyboard 8-5, 8-6 recycling xv
parts information 8-1 related publications xvii
passwords remote latency A-24
changing general access remote timeout A-24
password A-10 removal and replacement
changing privileged access procedures 7-1
password A-10 removal procedures
overview A-9 adapters 7-20
physical location codes 4-1, 4-6 battery 7-27
POST error codes 3-1 CEC fan 7-38
POST errors covers 7-5
read A-5 disk drive cage 7-40
disk drives 7-23, 7-25

Index X-3
removal procedures (continued) service center A-22
I/O board 7-33 service inspection guide 1-10
I/O fan 7-39 service mode
media drives 7-42 service processor procedures A-41
memory cards 7-11 service processor
memory modules 7-14 service processor checkpoints 3-33
operator panel 7-37 Service Processor menu inactivity A-3
power supply 7-35 service processor menus
processor and memory cover 7-10 accessing locally A-3
processor card 7-17 accessing remotely A-3
system board 7-30 call-in/call-out A-19
replacement procedures call-out policy A-23
adapters 7-21 customer account A-24
battery 7-29 general user A-4
CEC fan. 7-38 language selection A-18
covers 7-9 menu inactivity A-3
disk drive cage 7-41 privileged user A-6
disk drives 7-24, 7-25 reboot policy A-25
I/O board 7-34 restart policy A-25
I/O fan. 7-39 serial port selection A-20
media drives 7-43 serial port speed setup A-21
memory cards 7-12 setup menu A-8
memory modules 7-15 supported menu options A-2
operator panel 7-37 system information A-14
power supply 7-36 system power control A-12
processor and memory cover 7-10 telephone number A-21
processor card 7-18 service processor procedures in service
system board 7-32 mode A-41
reset Service Processor A-11 service provider A-22
restart recovery A-25, A-29 SP checkpoints 3-33
RETAIN A-24 SP operational phases A-39
retries A-24 specifications, system unit 1-12
ring indicator power-on A-13 standalone diagnostics 5-1
start talk mode A-10
STBY A-40
S stopping the system unit 7-4
safety notices xi
surveillance
seamless transfer of a modem
failure A-31
session A-47
operating system A-31
set parameters A-11

X-4 Service Guide

surveillance (continued)
system firmware A-31
V
voice phone number A-23
system administrator A-22
system cables 1-9
system information menu A-14
system management services
graphical system management
services 6-1
config 6-4
multiboot 6-5
utilities 6-8
text-based system management
services 6-23
display configuration 6-25
select language 6-38
utilities 6-29
system phone number A-23
system planar
component locations 1-7
removal and replacement 7-30
system POST errors
read A-5
system power-on methods A-28
system unit
stopping 7-4
system unit locations 1-1

T
telephone line requirements for the
United Kingdom xi
text-based system management
services 6-23
trademarks xvii

U
unattended start mode,
enable/disable A-12
United Kingdom’s telephone line
requirements xi

Index X-5
X-6 Service Guide
IBM 

Part Number: 08L0638

Printed in the United States of America

on recycled paper containing 10%
recovered post-consumer fiber.

October 1998
ð8Lð638

SA38-ð554-ðð